JP2023135014A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To proceed with a game appropriately.SOLUTION: A game machine of the present invention includes a main control unit that controls the progress of a game, and a sub-control unit that controls a performance on the basis of information transmitted from the main control unit. The main control unit includes command transmission means that sequentially determines commands related to the game and transmits the determined commands to the sub-control unit. The sub-control unit includes state management means that analyzes the received command and generates a message in response to receiving the command from the main control unit, and device control means that analyzes the message and generates performance data.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 7

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that uses a lottery to determine whether or not to award a gaming benefit to a player.

In general, in a gaming machine (pachinko machine), a game ball is launched toward a gaming area within the gaming board by the player's handle operation, and a special condition is set in which the gaming ball that flows down the gaming area enters the starting port. A lottery regarding the symbols is executed. Then, on the special symbol display, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and furthermore, the special symbol determined by the lottery is stopped and displayed, thereby notifying the player of the lottery result. At this time, when a specific special symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, a big prize game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game is started. In this big prize game, the attacker device opens and closes a predetermined number of times, allowing game balls to enter the big prize opening, allowing the player to receive a payout of many prize balls.

In such gaming machines, the sub-control section analyzes commands received from the main control section and executes effects according to the commands (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2021-029320A

The player can grasp the progress of the game through the effects executed by the sub-control unit. However, for example, if there is a large time difference between the player's operation and the corresponding performance, there will be a lag in the progress of the game, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

In view of such problems, the present invention aims to appropriately proceed with the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a main control section that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control section that controls the performance based on information transmitted from the main control section, The main control section includes command transmission means for sequentially determining commands related to the game and transmitting the determined commands to the sub-control section, and the sub-control section, in response to receiving commands from the main control section, The apparatus includes a state management means that analyzes the received command and generates a message, and a device control means that analyzes the message and generates performance data.

The cycle at which the state management means analyzes the command may be different from the cycle at which the device control means analyzes the message.

According to the present invention, it is possible to proceed with the game appropriately.

It is a perspective view of a game machine showing a state in which a door according to a simultaneous rotation reference example is opened. It is a front view of a gaming machine according to a simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a figure explaining the 2nd big prize winning hole concerning a simultaneous spin reference example. It is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game according to a simultaneous play reference example. It is a block diagram for explaining the control aspect of the main effect display section, the effect accessory device, the effect lighting device, the audio output device, and the effect operation device in the sub-control board. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the effect of varying the cycles of each process. 5 is a flowchart showing a control mode of a state management means. 3 is a flowchart showing control modes of a display control means, an audio control means, and a device control means. It is a flowchart which shows the control aspect of an operation control means. It is a flowchart which shows the control aspect of a lighting control means. It is a flowchart which shows the control aspect of accessory control means. It is an address map of the memory area used by the main CPU according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a diagram explaining a random number determination table for determining a jackpot at high accuracy according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining a winning pattern random number determination table and a small winning pattern random number determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the reach group determination random number determination table based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the reach mode determination random number determination table based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the variation pattern random number determination table based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the variable time determination table based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the game state and fluctuation time concerning a simultaneous play reference example. It is the 1st figure explaining the special electric accessory operation ram set table concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 2nd figure explaining the special electric accessory operation ram set table concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the game state setting table concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining a winning decision random number judgment table concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. (a) is a diagram explaining a normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and (b) is a diagram explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state in accordance with the original game nature according to the simultaneous play reference example. It is a diagram explaining the transition of the game state when the game is not played properly according to the simultaneous play reference example. It is a figure explaining the gaming machine state flag concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a 1st flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in the main control board based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a 2nd flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in the main control board based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. 12 is a flowchart illustrating sub-command group set processing in the main control board according to a simultaneous execution reference example. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a power-off evacuation process in the main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 12 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing in a main control board according to a simultaneous running reference example. 12 is a flowchart illustrating setting-related processing in the main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 12 is a flowchart illustrating switch management processing in a main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the gate passing process in the main control board based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the 1st starting port passage process in the main control board based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the 2nd starting port passage process in the main control board based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol random number acquisition process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the effect determination process at the time of acquisition in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize opening passage process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a diagram explaining a special game management phase and a special electric accessory game management phase according to a simultaneous play reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special game management process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol change waiting process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol hit determination process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variation number determination process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the number cut management process in the main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special symbol fluctuation in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart explaining pattern forced stop processing in the main control board concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special electric accessory game management process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening pre-opening process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening opening/closing switching process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening control process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening closing effective processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize opening end wait process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a diagram explaining a normal game management phase according to a simultaneous play reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal game management process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol change waiting process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol stop symbol display processing on the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric accessory prize opening pre-opening process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric accessory prize opening control process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric accessory prize winning opening closing effective processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric accessory winning a prize opening end wait process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation performance of the non-reach fluctuation pattern concerning a performance reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation performance of the normal reach fluctuation pattern concerning a performance reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation performance of the developed reach fluctuation pattern at the time of loss according to the performance reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation performance of the developed reach fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot according to the performance reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuating performance when the reach development performance concerning a performance reference example is performed twice. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation performance of the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern concerning a performance reference example. It is a figure explaining the variable production decision table concerning a production reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the hold display performance concerning a performance reference example. (a) is a diagram explaining the final pending display pattern determination table according to the production reference example, and (b) is a diagram explaining the previous suspension display pattern determination table according to the production reference example. It is a flowchart explaining sub CPU initialization processing in a sub control board concerning a performance reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the sub-timer interruption process in the sub-control board based on a performance reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the prefetch designation command reception process in the sub-control board based on a performance reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation command reception process in the sub-control board concerning a performance reference example. FIG. 2 is an external view for explaining a schematic mechanical configuration of a slot machine. FIG. 2 is an external view of the slot machine with the front door opened for explaining the general mechanical configuration of the slot machine. It is a figure explaining the pattern arrangement of a reel, and an active line. 1 is a block diagram showing a schematic electrical configuration of a slot machine. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning combination. It is a figure showing a winning type lottery table. It is a figure showing a winning type lottery table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining transition of a game state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of performance states. 3 is a flowchart illustrating CPU initialization processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart explaining cold start processing in a main control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating error stop processing in the main control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value switching process in the main control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating initialization start processing in the main control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating state recovery processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart explaining game start processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the game medal insertion process in the main control board. It is a flowchart explaining internal lottery processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the pattern code setting process in the main control board. It is a flowchart explaining processing during rotation of a drum in a main control board. It is a flow chart explaining rotation drum stop processing in a main control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating display determination processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart explaining payout processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining game transfer processing in the main control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a power-off save process in the main control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing in the main control board.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The dimensions, materials, and other specific numerical values shown in these embodiments are merely illustrative to facilitate understanding of the invention, and do not limit the invention unless otherwise specified. In this specification and the drawings, elements with substantially the same functions and configurations are given the same reference numerals to omit redundant explanation, and elements not directly related to the present invention are omitted from illustration. do.

In the embodiment of the present invention, a pachinko machine and a slot machine are illustrated in that order as gaming machines, and then specific processing will be explained in detail.

<Pachinko machine>
In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present invention, first, as a reference example of simultaneous rotation, the mechanical configuration and electrical configuration of a so-called simultaneous rotation machine, and specific processing on each board will be explained. Then, as a reference example of a performance, a specific performance that can be executed in the simultaneous spinning machine and a specific process related to the performance will be explained. Thereafter, configurations different from those of each reference example will be specifically explained as examples of the present invention.

<Simultaneous rotation reference example>
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine 100 according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and shows a state in which the door is opened. As shown in the figure, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 102 in which a surrounding space is formed by four sides arranged in a substantially rectangular shape, an inner frame 104 attached to the outer frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism, and The front frame 106 is attached to the middle frame 104 by a hinge mechanism so as to be openable and closable.

Similar to the outer frame 102, the inner frame 104 has a surrounding space formed by four sides arranged in a substantially rectangular shape, and a game board 108 is held in this surrounding space. Further, the front frame 106 holds a transparent plate 110 made of glass or resin. When the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are closed to the outer frame 102, the game board 108 and the transparent plate 110 face each other substantially parallel to each other while maintaining a predetermined distance, and from the front side of the game machine 100, , the game board 108 becomes visible through the transparent plate 110.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to a reference example of simultaneous play. As shown in this figure, an operating handle 112 that protrudes toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 is provided at the lower part of the front frame 106. This operation handle 112 is provided so that the player can rotate it, and when the player rotates the operation handle 112 to perform a firing operation, the operation handle 112 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 112, and when the player performs a firing operation, the operation handle 112 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 112. A game ball is fired by the firing mechanism. The game ball launched in this manner ascends between the rails 114a and 114b provided on the game board 108 and is guided to the game area 116.

The game area 116 is a space formed between the game board 108 and the transparent plate 110, and is an area where the game balls can flow down or roll. The game board 108 is provided with a large number of nails and windmills (not shown), and the game ball guided into the game area 116 collides with the nails and windmills, causing it to flow down and roll in irregular directions. I have to.

The game area 116 includes a first game area 116a and a second game area 116b, in which the degree of entry of game balls is different depending on the firing strength of the firing mechanism, and game balls can be shot separately. The first gaming area 116a is located on the left side of the gaming area 116 when viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 100, and the second gaming area 116b is located on the left side of the gaming area 116 when viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 100. It is located on the right side. Since the rails 114a and 114b are on the left side of the game area 116, game balls fired by the firing mechanism with a firing strength lower than the predetermined strength enter the first game area 116a and are fired with a firing strength equal to or higher than the predetermined strength. The game ball that has been played enters the second game area 116b.

In addition, the gaming area 116 is provided with a general prize opening 118 into which game balls can enter, a first fixed starting opening 120A, a first variable starting opening 120B, a second starting opening 122, and a normal figure operating opening 125. , When a game ball enters these general prize opening 118, first fixed starting opening 120A, first variable starting opening 120B, second starting opening 122, and normal pattern operation opening 125, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player. It will be done. In addition, below, 120 A of 1st fixed starting ports and the 1st variable starting port 120B are named generically, and are called the 1st starting port 120.

As will be described in detail later, a first starting region is provided within the first starting port 120, and a second starting region is provided within the second starting port 122. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122 and enters the first starting area or the second starting area, one of the plurality of special symbols provided in advance is selected. A lottery is held to determine the No. 1 special symbol. Each special symbol is associated with whether or not a large winning game or a small winning game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, the player not only obtains a predetermined prize ball but also has the opportunity to obtain the right to receive various gaming benefits. becomes.

Further, the first fixed starting port 120A, the second starting port 122, and the standard operating port 125 are constituted by fixed starting ports that are open to allow game balls to enter at all times. On the other hand, the first variable starting port 120B is provided with a movable piece 120b that can be opened and closed, and the ease with which the game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B changes depending on the state of the movable piece 120b. Consists of a variable starting port. Specifically, the movable piece 120b is normally maintained in a closed state, and during this time, it becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B.

On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 provided in the game area 116 (second game area 116b) or when a game ball enters the normal pattern operation opening 125, a lottery of normal symbols to be described later is performed. If a winner is won in this lottery, the movable piece 120b is controlled to be in the open state for a predetermined period of time. When the movable piece 120b is in the open state, a game ball can enter the first variable starting port 120B. In this way, the movable piece 120b has an open state that allows a game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B, and an open state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B than in the open state. Otherwise, it functions as a movable member (variable start winning device) that transitions to the closed state, which is impossible.

Note that the first fixed starting port 120A allows only game balls flowing down the first gaming area 116a to enter, and the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 allow entry of game balls flowing down the second gaming area 116b. It is placed in a position where only the ball can enter. Note that a game ball flowing down the second game area 116b may enter the first fixed starting port 120A, but in this case, the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a is It is desirable to arrange the game area 116b at a position where it is easier for the ball to enter than the game ball flowing down.

Similarly, a game ball flowing down the first game area 116a may enter the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122, but in this case, a game ball flowing down the second game area 116b may enter the first variable starting port 120B and the second variable starting port 122. It is desirable that the ball be placed in a position where it is easier for the ball to enter the first game area 116a than the game ball flowing down. In any case, the first fixed starting port 120A is arranged at a position where at least a game ball flowing down the first gaming area 116a can enter, and the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 are arranged at least in a position where a game ball flowing down the first gaming area 116a can enter. 2. It is preferable that the game ball flowing down the game area 116b be placed at a position where the ball can enter.

Furthermore, a first big winning hole 126 and a second big winning hole 128 are provided in the second gaming area 116b. The first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 are arranged at positions where only game balls flowing down the second gaming area 116b can enter. However, the first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 may be arranged so that any game ball flowing down the first gaming area 116a and the second gaming area 116b can enter.

The first big prize opening 126 is provided with an opening/closing door 126b that can be opened and closed. Normally, the opening/closing door 126b closes the first big winning opening 126 to prevent game balls from entering the first big winning opening 126. The ball has become impossible. Specifically, in the closed state, the opening/closing door 126b is flush with the board surface of the game board 108, and the game ball flows down in front of the first big prize opening 126. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned big prize game is executed, the opening/closing door 126b is opened and functions as a tray that guides the game ball to the first big winning hole 126, and the game ball enters the first big winning hole 126. The ball becomes possible. Then, when a game ball enters the first big prize opening 126, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

The second big winning hole 128 is provided below the first big winning hole 126 in the second gaming area 116b. The second big prize opening 128 includes a movable piece 128b, and the movable piece 128b is normally maintained in a closed state. On the other hand, when a small winning game to be described later is executed, the movable piece 128b is controlled to be in an open state, and the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 128. In addition, below, the 1st big winning hole 126 and the 2nd big winning hole 128 are collectively simply called a big winning hole.

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the second grand prize opening 128 according to a simultaneous spinning reference example. A structure 129 that protrudes toward the front side of the game board 108 is provided in the second game area 116b. This structure 129 is surrounded by the four sides located in the left-right direction and the front-back direction of the gaming machine 100, as well as the bottom, and has an opening formed in the upper part. The opening formed in the upper part of this structure 129 becomes the second big prize opening 128. A movable piece 128b is provided at the top of the structure 129, and normally, as shown in FIG. .

The movable piece 128b faces above the gaming machine 100 and protrudes into the gaming area 116 where the gaming ball rolls and flows down. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is maintained in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the game area 116 (second game area 116b) will fall onto the movable piece 128b. Here, the base of the structure 129 is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction, and the right side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly longer in the height direction than the left side. Therefore, the second big prize opening 128 is positioned so that the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side, and the movable piece 128b maintained in the closed state is positioned so that the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. is inclined to. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is in the closed state, the game ball that has fallen onto the movable piece 128b slowly rolls from the right to the left on the movable piece 128b, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 3(a). It will move.

Then, when a small winning game to be described later is executed, the movable piece 128b shifts to the open state in which the second big prize opening 128 is opened. Here, the movable piece 128b changes from the closed state to the open state by sliding toward the back side of the game board 108, as shown in FIG. 3(b). As a result, when changing from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b falls into the second grand prize opening 128 under its own weight.

In this manner, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the movable piece 128b is slightly inclined to ensure a long time for the game ball to roll on the movable piece 128b. Then, when the movable piece 128b changes from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b is guided into the second grand prize opening 128. With the above configuration, even if the time for maintaining the movable piece 128b in the open state is set slightly, a predetermined number of game balls can be guided into the second big prize opening 128. In other words, the time required to maintain the movable piece 128b in the open state, which is necessary to allow a predetermined number of game balls to enter the second big prize opening 128, can be shortened. Note that a hole communicating with the back side of the game board 108 is formed on the back side of the structure 129, and the game ball that enters the second grand prize opening 128 is discharged to the back side of the game board 108. . Then, when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 128, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

In addition, although the structure of the 2nd big winning a prize opening 128 was demonstrated here, the 1st variable starting opening 120B is also the same structure as the 2nd big winning a prize opening 128. That is, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B protrudes to the front side of the game board 108 in the closed state, and the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. In the open state of the movable piece 120b, the movable piece 120b slides toward the back side of the game board 108, allowing the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. However, as shown in FIG. 2, the right side of the movable piece 128b is higher than the left side when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the front, whereas the left side of the movable piece 120b is on the right side when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the front. located higher than.

Here, the board structure of the second game area 116b will be described in detail. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the second starting port 122 and the gate 124 are arranged in parallel at the top of the second game area 116b. All the game balls guided to the second game area 116b either enter the second starting port 122 or pass through the gate 124 and flow downward. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the second starting port 122 pays out one game ball as a prize ball for each game ball that enters.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 122, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a big winning game or a small winning game. Further, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the first variable starting port 120B (movable piece 120b) is to be opened.

Directly below the second starting opening 122 and the gate 124, a first big winning opening 126 is provided. When the first big prize opening 126 is in the open state, all of the game balls that have passed through the gate 124 and flowed down are arranged so as to enter the first big prize opening 126. In the simultaneous spinning reference example, the first big prize opening 126 is opened only in the big prize game. In other words, the first big winning hole 126 can be said to be a big winning hole exclusively for big prize games. When a game ball enters the first big prize opening 126 during a big prize game, a predetermined number of two or more (15 in this case) game balls are paid out as prize balls for each game ball that enters. .

A first variable starting opening 120B is provided below the first big winning opening 126. In addition, an out port 131 is provided between the first big winning port 126 and the first variable starting port 120B. The out port 131 is the entrance of a passage for discharging game balls from the gaming area 116, and even if a game ball enters the out port 131, no prize ball is paid out.

Nails are arranged in the second game area 116b so that most (for example, 90% or more) of the game balls that have flowed down from the first big prize opening 126 fall onto the movable piece 120b. In addition, a part (for example, 1% to 10%) of the game balls that have flowed downward from the first big prize opening 126 are guided to the out opening 131 by these nails.

When the first variable starting port 120B is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. When the movable piece 120b is opened while the game balls are rolling on the movable piece 120b, all the game balls on the movable piece 120b are guided into the first variable starting port 120B. When a game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each game ball that enters, and it is also determined whether or not to execute a big prize game or a small winning game. A lottery will be held.

Game balls that have not entered the first variable starting port 120B fall from above the movable piece 120b to the right side of the gaming machine 100 when viewed from the front. A second big winning opening 128 is provided below the first variable starting opening 120B, and most of the game balls that fall from above the movable piece 120b roll on the movable piece 128b of the second big winning opening 128. do. The game ball on the movable piece 128b slowly rolls from the right side to the left side when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the front due to the inclination of the movable piece 128b.

Although details will be described later, in the simultaneous spin reference example, the second large prize opening 128 is opened only in the small winning game. In other words, the second big winning hole 128 can be said to be a big winning hole exclusively for small winning games. When the movable piece 128b is opened while the game balls are rolling on the movable piece 128b, all the game balls on the movable piece 128b are guided into the second big prize opening 128. When a game ball enters the second large prize opening 128 during a small winning game, a predetermined number of two or more (15 in this case) game balls are paid out as prize balls for each game ball that enters. It will be done.

A normal figure operation opening 125 is provided at the lower left of the second big prize opening 128. Here, nails are arranged in the second game area 116b so that almost all of the game balls that fall downward from above the second big prize opening 128 enter the normal pattern operation opening 125. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the common figure operation opening 125 constitutes a "specific winning opening" in which one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each game ball that enters. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the normal pattern operating port 125, it is determined whether or not to open the first variable starting port 120B (movable piece 120b), similarly to when the game ball passes through the gate 124. A lottery will be held.

In addition, at the bottom of the gaming area 116, there are game balls that did not enter any of the general prize opening 118, first starting opening 120, second starting opening 122, normal figure operation opening 125, and big winning opening. A discharge port 130 is provided for discharging the water from the game area 116 to the back side of the game board 108.

The gaming machine 100 includes an effect display device 200 consisting of a liquid crystal display device, an effect accessory device 202 consisting of a movable device, and an effect display device 200 that performs effects while the game is in progress, etc., and an effect display device 202 consisting of a movable device, which is controlled in various lighting modes and emitting colors. A production lighting device 204 consisting of a lamp, an audio output device 206 consisting of a speaker, and a production operation device 208 that receives operations from a player are provided.

The effect display device 200 includes a main effect display section 200a consisting of an image display section that displays an image, and this main effect display section 200a is visible from the front side of the gaming machine 100 at approximately the center of the game board 108. It is arranged as possible. Various effects will be executed on this main effect display section 200a, such as three effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c being displayed in a variable manner as shown in the figure.

The performance accessory device 202 is placed in front of the main performance display section 200a, and is usually retracted in a state where it is divided into a plurality of components at the origin position on the back side of the game board 108, so that the player can It is no longer visible. Then, when each component moves to a movable position in front of the main effect display section 200a by driving the actuator while the above-mentioned effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are being displayed in a variable manner, the front surface of the main effect display section 200a Each component unites to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a jackpot.

The effect lighting device 204 is provided in the effect accessory device 202, the game board 108, etc., and is controlled to be lit in various ways according to the image etc. displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

The audio output device 206 is provided at the upper position of the front frame 106 or the lowermost position of the outer frame 102, and outputs various sounds toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 in accordance with the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a. Output audio.

The production operation device 208 is composed of a button that accepts a pressing operation by a player, and is provided at a substantially central position in the width direction of the gaming machine 100 and at a position below the transparent plate 110. This effect operation device 208 is activated according to the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and when it receives an operation from the player within the operation effective time, various operations are performed according to the operation. The performance is executed.

In addition, the reference numeral 132 in the figure is an upper tray into which the prize balls paid out from the gaming machine 100 and the game balls lent out from the game ball rental device are guided, and when the upper tray 132 is full of game balls, the game balls are It will be guided to the lower tray 134. Further, a ball removal hole (not shown) for ejecting game balls from the lower tray 134 is formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 134. This ball removal hole is normally closed by an opening/closing plate (not shown), but by pressing down the ball removal knob 134a, the opening/closing plate slides together with the ball removal knob 134a, and the ball removal hole is closed. It is possible to discharge game balls from below the lower tray 134.

In addition, on the game board 108, a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, and a first special symbol reserved are located outside the gaming area 116 and in a position that is visible to the player. A display 164, a second special symbol reservation display 166, a normal symbol display 168, a regular symbol reservation display 170, and a right hit notification display 172 are provided. Each of these displays 160 to 172 is a device for displaying various situations related to the game, and details thereof will be described later.

(Internal configuration of control means)
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game according to a simultaneous play reference example.

The main control board 300 controls the basic operations of the game. This main control board 300 includes a main CPU 300a, a main ROM 300b, and a main RAM 300c. The main CPU 300a reads the program stored in the main ROM 300b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, and also directly controls each device and display, or uses the results of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly. The main RAM 300c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the main CPU 300a.

The main control board 300 includes a general winning hole detection switch 118s that detects that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 118, and a first fixed start port that detects that a game ball has entered the first fixed starting port 120A. A starting port detection switch 120As, a first variable starting port detection switch 120Bs that detects that a game ball has entered the first variable starting port 120B, and a second variable starting port detection switch 120Bs that detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 122. A starting port detection switch 122s, a gate detection switch 124s that detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 124, a normal pattern operation port detection switch 125s that detects that a game ball has entered the normal pattern operation port 125, and a first large A first big winning hole detection switch 126s that detects that a game ball has entered the winning hole 126, and a second big winning hole detection switch 128s that detects that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 128 are connected. Detection signals are input to the main control board 300 from each of these detection switches.

In addition, the main control board 300 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 120c that operates the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting opening 120B, and a first big prize opening that operates the opening/closing door 126b that opens and closes the first big prize opening 126. The solenoid 126c and the second large winning opening solenoid 128c that operates the movable piece 128b that opens and closes the second large winning opening 128 are connected, and the main control board 300 controls the first variable starting opening 120B and the first large winning opening. The opening and closing of the winning opening 126 and the second big winning opening 128 is controlled.

Furthermore, the main control board 300 includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol reservation display 164, a second special symbol reservation display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol display 168. A symbol holding display 170 and a right hit notification display 172 are connected, and the main control board 300 controls the display of each of these displays.

Furthermore, a setting change switch 180s is provided on the back side of the game board 108. The setting change switch 180s is configured to be accessible by a dedicated key. On the condition that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, it is possible to change and confirm the setting value. Although details will be described later, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous playback reference example, any of the six levels of setting values with different degrees of advantage is stored as a registered setting value in the setting value buffer, and the game machine 100 is set according to the stored registered setting value. The game progresses. Here, it is assumed that the setting value is in six stages, but the setting value may be provided in only two stages, high setting and low setting, or may be provided in other plural stages. Furthermore, the set value is not essential, and the degree of advantage does not need to be changed.

Further, a RAM clear button is provided on the back side of the game board 108 so that it can be pressed down, and the pressing operation of this RAM clear button is detected by the RAM clear switch 182s. The RAM clear switch 182s is connected to the main control board 300, and a RAM clear operation signal is input to the main control board 300 from the RAM clear switch 182s. If a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s when the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a clears the main RAM 300c.

Furthermore, a performance display monitor 184 is provided on the back side of the game board 108. The main control board 300 displays registered setting values and base ratios on the performance display monitor 184.

In addition, the game machine 100 of the simultaneous play reference example mainly plays a special game that is started by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, and the passing of the game ball into the gate 124, or , and a normal game that is started by the entry of a game ball into the normal pattern operating port 125. The main ROM 300b of the main control board 300 stores various programs for playing special games and normal games, as well as data and tables necessary for various games.

Further, a payout control board 310 and a sub-control board 330 are connected to the main control board 300. The payout control board 310 performs control for shooting game balls and control for paying out prize balls. This payout control board 310 also includes a CPU, ROM, and RAM, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. A game information output terminal board 312 is connected to this payout control board 310, and various information regarding game progress outputted from the main control board 300 is transmitted via the payout control board 310 and the game information output terminal board 312. , and will be output to the hall computer of the game parlor.

Further, a payout motor 314 is connected to the payout control board 310 for paying out the game balls stored in the storage section as prize balls to the player. The payout control board 310 controls the payout motor 314 based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300 to pay out predetermined prize balls to the player. At this time, the number of game balls that have been paid out is detected by the paid-out ball counting switch 316s, so that it can be ascertained whether the prize balls that should be paid out have been paid out to the player.

Further, a tray full detection switch 318s that detects the full state of the lower tray 134 is connected to the payout control board 310. This tray full detection switch 318s is provided in a passage that guides game balls paid out as prize balls to the lower tray 134, and a game ball detection signal is input to the payout control board 310.

When a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 134 and the game ball becomes full, the game balls stay in the passage toward the lower tray 134 and are sent from the tray full detection switch 318s toward the payout control board 310. , game ball detection signals are continuously input. When the game ball detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period of time, the payout control board 310 determines that the lower tray 134 is full, and sends a full tray command to the main control board 300. On the other hand, if the continuous input of the game ball detection signal is interrupted after transmitting the full plate command, it is determined that the full state has been canceled, and a full plate release command is sent to the main control board 300.

Further, the payout control board 310 is provided with a launch control circuit 320 that controls the launch of game balls. A touch sensor 112s that is provided on the operating handle 112 and detects that the player has touched the operating handle 112, and an operating volume 112a that detects the operating angle of the operating handle 112 are connected to the payout control board 310. ing. Then, when a signal is input from the touch sensor 112s and the operation volume 112a, the firing control circuit 320 controls to energize the firing solenoid 112c provided in the game ball firing device to fire the game ball.

The sub-control board 330 mainly controls various effects such as during gaming and on standby. The sub-control board 330 includes a sub-CPU 330a, a sub-ROM 330b, and a sub-RAM 330c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330. . The sub CPU 330a reads out the program stored in the sub ROM 330b based on commands transmitted from the main control board 300, input signals from the timer, etc., performs arithmetic processing, and controls execution of effects. At this time, the sub-RAM 330c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the sub-CPU 330a.

<Device management>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram for explaining the control mode of the main effect display section 200a, the effect accessory device 202, the effect lighting device 204, the audio output device 206, and the effect operation device 208 on the sub-control board 330. The sub CPU 330a provided in the sub control board 330 cooperates with the program stored in the sub ROM 330b and the sub RAM 330c to perform state management means (state management task) 331, device control means (device task) 332, and display control means. It functions as a (drawing task) 333, a voice control means (sound task) 334, an operation control means (operation task) 335, an illumination control means (lighting task) 336, and an accessory control means (movable body task) 337. The state management means 331, device control means 332, display control means 333, audio control means 334, operation control means 335, lighting control means 336, and accessory control means 337 are executed in response to predetermined interrupt processing.

The state management means 331 performs state management regarding the performance. Specifically, the state management means 331 is activated immediately upon receiving a command (main command) from the main CPU 300a (command transmission means) of the main control board 300, analyzes the command transmitted from the main control board 300, and executes a predetermined command. Based on the produced effect table, the effect pattern (contents indicating a series of effects) such as a variable effect corresponding to the command is determined, and each device (main effect display section 200a, effect accessory device 202, effect A message is generated for each lighting device 204, audio output device 206, performance operation device 208) and added to the operation buffer. Here, the message indicates the output timing to each device and the operation pattern of each device.

For example, the state management means 331 generates a performance pattern (image pattern) indicating a mode and three symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) as variables for the main performance display section 200a. Here, the mode indicates the state of the performance such as symbol fluctuation and reach, and the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol indicate the symbol that finally stops after the symbol changes. The unit length of data managed by the sub CPU 330a (hereinafter simply referred to as "management unit length") can be, for example, 32 bits. The management unit length is the length of 8 bits, which is the calculation unit of the computer, multiplied by a power of 2 (2^0, 2^1, 2^2, ...), for example, 8 bits (8 bits x 2^0), 16 bits (8 bits x 2^1), or 32 bits (8 bits x 2^2). In this way, by managing data with a data length that is easy to calculate by the sub CPU 330a, computer processing can proceed smoothly. For example, the state management means 331 assigns a mode to an area of the upper 16 bits (bits 31 to 16) as a message, allocates a left pattern to an area of 4 bits from bits 11 to 8, and assigns a left pattern to an area of 4 bits from bits 11 to 8. The middle symbol is assigned to the 4-bit area up to, and the right symbol is assigned to the 4-bit area from bit 3 to bit 0. Note that 4 bits from bit 15 to bit 12 of the message are not used (unused), and 0 is inserted into all bits. Here, since four variables can be managed with one message, the sub CPU 330a can handle four variables at once just by generating one message, and can keep the registers valid while suppressing the number of accesses. Can be used.

The device control means 332 analyzes each message accumulated in the operation buffer, and generates performance data for operating each device based on the operation pattern included in the message according to the output timing included in the message. .

Here, the performance data has contents that instruct specific operations of each device. For example, the device control means 332 generates effect data that instructs the display control means 333 about the image type, display start time, and total display time to be displayed on the main effect display section 200a. Further, the device control means 332 generates performance data that instructs the audio control means 334 to type the music to be output to the audio output device 206, output start time, and total output time. Further, the device control means 332 generates effect data that instructs the lighting control means 336 about the lighting target, lighting time, and blinking cycle in the effect lighting device 204. The device control means 332 also provides the accessory control means 337 with information on the operation start time, total operation time, advancing direction (rotation direction), advancement amount (rotation amount), and advancement speed (rotation speed) of the performance accessory device 202. ) is generated.

The display control means 333, the audio control means 334, the illumination control means 336, and the accessory control means 337 convert the production data generated by the device control means 332 into device data (data) for operating each device. Periodically output device data according to device specifications. Here, the device data is information that is predetermined for each device and is configured with ON (“1”) and OFF (“0”).

Each device operates according to such device data. For example, the display control means 333 performs image display control to display an image on the main effect display section 200a. The sub ROM 330b stores a large amount of image data such as symbols, backgrounds, subtitles, etc. to be displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and the display control means 333 reads out the image data from the sub ROM 330b to a VRAM (not shown). Controls image display on the main effect display section 200a. Further, the audio control means 334 performs audio output control to cause the audio output device 206 to output audio. The sub ROM 330b stores a large amount of audio data such as voices and songs output from the audio output device 206, and the audio control means 334 reads out the audio data from the sub ROM 330b and controls the audio output of the audio output device 206. Control. Further, the operation control means 335 receives the player's operation on the production operation device 208 through the serial interface. Further, the lighting control means 336 controls lighting of the effect lighting device 204. Further, the accessory control means 337 drives an actuator to control the movement of the performance accessory device 202.

In this way, the state management means 331 analyzes the command sent from the main control board 300 and generates a message, the device control means 332 analyzes the message and generates presentation data, and the display control means 333, The audio control means 334, the illumination control means 336, and the accessory control means 337 convert the performance data into device data and periodically output the data to each device. Here, by distributing the series of processes into three stages, it is possible to fit each process into the processing time allowed by the timer interrupt time.

In addition, each functional means (state management means 331, device control means 332, display control means 333, audio control means 334, operation control means 335, lighting control means 336, accessory control means 337) needs to be processed early. (immediacy) and the reaction speed of the device, processing is executed at an appropriate cycle. For example, processes that are highly required to be processed early are preferentially executed in short cycles. In this way, it is possible to speed up the overall processing. Furthermore, for devices with slow reaction speeds, even if device data is output early, the device will not be able to react, so this is intentionally executed at a long cycle. In this way, other processes can be executed preferentially during a long period, so it is possible to effectively utilize processing time by distributing processes.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the effect of varying the cycles of each process. Here, the state management means 331 and the device control means 332 will be explained. For example, as shown in FIG. 6A, the state management means 331 executes the process (indicated by hatching in FIG. 6) at a cycle of 16.6 msec, and the device control means 332 executes the process at a cycle of 16.6 msec, which is equal to the cycle of the state management means 331. It is assumed that the process (indicated by black filling in FIG. 6) is executed at a cycle of . Here, since the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330 operate independently, the timing at which commands are received from the main control board 300 is irregular. Therefore, when a command is received at the timing shown in FIG. 6(a), that is, immediately after the processing of the state management means 331 is executed, the timing at which the state management means 331 analyzes the command is as shown by the arrow. The timing at which the device control means 332 analyzes the message is the timing after the timing at which the state management means 331 analyzes the command.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, the device control means 332 executes processing at a cycle of 16.6 msec, but the state management means 331 executes processing at a cycle of 521 μsec, which is faster than the cycle. Here, the processing content of the state management means 331 is limited to command analysis, thereby significantly shortening the cycle. Note that in FIG. 6B, for convenience of explanation, the number of processes performed by the state management means 331 is shown to be smaller than the original number. When a command is received from the main control board 300 at the same timing as shown in FIG. Therefore, the timing at which the device control means 332 analyzes the message is after the timing at which the state management means 331 analyzes the command. As can be understood by comparing FIG. 6(a) and FIG. 6(b), it can be seen that as a result, the timing at which the device control means 332 analyzes the message is earlier by 16.6 msec. In this way, it is possible to accelerate the timing at which messages, performance data, and device data are generated relative to the reception timing from the main control board 300.

Hereinafter, the operation of each functional means (state management means 331, device control means 332, display control means 333, audio control means 334, operation control means 335, lighting control means 336, accessory control means 337) will be described in detail.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the control mode of the state management means 331. The numerical values in step S in the explanation of FIG. 7 will be used only in the explanation of this figure.

(Step S1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a predetermined interrupt period (for example, 521 μsec) has arrived. As a result, if the predetermined interrupt cycle has arrived (YES in S1), the process moves to step S2, and if the predetermined interrupt cycle has not arrived (NO in S1), the process in step S1 is repeated. Note that the interrupt period of 521 μsec is a value obtained by multiplying the system clock of the sub CPU 330a.

(Step S2)
The state management means 331 analyzes the command sent from the main control board 300, determines a performance pattern such as a variable performance corresponding to the command based on the performance table, and generates a message for each device.

(Step S3)
The state management means 331 stores the message in the operation buffer and repeats the processing from step S1.

Here, by shortening the processing cycle of the state management means 331, which requires early processing, to 521 μsec, it is possible to effectively utilize the processing time.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the control mode of the display control means 333, the audio control means 334, and the device control means 332. The numerical values in step S in the explanation of FIG. 8 will be used only in the explanation of this figure.

(Step S1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a predetermined interrupt period (for example, 16.6 msec) has arrived. As a result, if the predetermined interrupt cycle has arrived (YES in S1), the process moves to step S2, and if the predetermined interrupt cycle has not arrived (NO in S1), the process in step S1 is repeated. Note that the interrupt period of 16.6 msec is a value obtained by multiplying a dot clock different from the system clock. Here, since the image processing is performed based on the dot clock, the processing of the display control means 333 described below is also based on the dot clock.

(Step S2)
The display control means 333 converts content corresponding to an image to be displayed on the main effect display section 200a out of the effects indicated by the effect data into device data (image data).

(Step S3)
The display control means 333 periodically outputs device data to the image IC 340a. Image IC 340a is also called VDP (Video Display Processor), reads image data specified by device data from image ROM 340b to image RAM (VRAM) 340c, and sequentially outputs the image data to main effect display section 200a. Note that the image RAM 340c has different layers, and each layer can hold different image data. The image IC 340a then superimposes the image data held in a plurality of layers, and outputs the superimposed image data to the main effect display section 200a.

(Step S4)
The audio control means 334 converts content corresponding to the audio to be output to the audio output device 206 out of the performance indicated by the performance data into device data (sound data).

(Step S5)
The audio control means 334 periodically outputs device data to the music IC 346a. The music IC 346a reads audio data specified by the device data from the music ROM 346b to the music IC 346a, and sequentially outputs the audio data to the speaker, which is the audio output device 206. Note that the music IC 346a has a plurality of music buffers (buffers), and each music buffer can hold different audio data. Then, the music IC 346a superimposes the audio data held in the plurality of music buffers, and outputs the superimposed audio data to the audio output device 206.

(Step S6)
The device control means 332 analyzes each message accumulated in the operation buffer, and generates performance data for operating each device based on the operation pattern included in the message according to the output timing included in the message. .

(Step S7)
The device control means 332 transmits the production data to each functional means (display control means 333, audio control means 334, lighting control means 336, accessory control means 337), and repeats the processing from step S1. Therefore, the processing of the display control means 333 in step S2 and the processing of the audio control means 334 in step S4 for the generated effect data will be executed at the next interrupt period (for example, after 16.6 msec).

Here, by separating and distributing the message analysis processing by the state management means 331 and the message analysis processing by the device control means 332, it is possible to fit each processing into the processing time allowed by the timer interrupt time. becomes. Furthermore, as described above, while the processing cycle of the state management means 331, which requires early processing, is shortened to 521 μsec, the processing cycle of the device control means 332 is not shortened to 16.6 msec. It is possible to make effective use of time.

Here, by executing the processing of the display control means 333 and the audio control means 334, which strictly require periodicity, before the processing of the device control means 332, which does not strictly require periodicity, the display and It is possible to prevent audio lag.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the control mode of the operation control means 335. The numerical values in step S in the explanation of FIG. 9 will be used only in the explanation of this figure.

(Step S1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a predetermined interrupt period (for example, 1.04 msec) has arrived. As a result, if the predetermined interrupt cycle has arrived (YES in S1), the process moves to step S2, and if the predetermined interrupt cycle has not arrived (NO in S1), the process of step S1 is repeated. Note that the interrupt period of 1.04 msec is a value obtained by multiplying the system clock.

(Step S2)
The operation control means 335 extracts the data input into the buffer through the serial interface. This data indicates whether or not the player has operated the production operation device 208, for example, "1" indicates that the production operation device 208 has been operated, and "0" indicates that it has not operated.

(Step S3)
The operation control means 335 registers the extracted data as operation information in the main data buffer, and repeats the processing from step S1. In addition, the operation control means 335 determines a change in operation (edge), for example, a change in the operation state from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", and The information may be registered in the main data buffer as operation information. The state management means 331 extracts operation information from the main data buffer, and determines various effects such as displaying an image on the main effect display section 200a based on the operation information.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the control mode of the illumination control means 336. The numerical values in step S in the explanation of FIG. 10 will be used only in the explanation of this figure.

(Step S1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a predetermined interrupt period (for example, 2.08 msec) has arrived. As a result, if the predetermined interrupt cycle has arrived (YES in S1), the process moves to step S2, and if the predetermined interrupt cycle has not arrived (NO in S1), the process in step S1 is repeated. Note that the interrupt period of 2.08 msec is a value obtained by multiplying the system clock.

(Step S2)
The lighting control means 336 converts content (1 (ON) or 0 (OFF)) indicating a series of lighting modes of the performance lighting device 204 out of the performance indicated by the performance pattern into device data (lighting data).

(Step S3)
The lighting control means 336 periodically outputs device data to the controller 342 and repeats the processing from step S1. The controller 342 turns on or off the FET that drives the effect lighting device 204 according to the device data. In this way, the lighting of the lamp that is the effect lighting device 204 is controlled.

Note that the brightness of the lamp, which is the effect lighting device 204, is controlled by PWM (Pulse Width Modulation). Therefore, a short cycle of 2.08 msec is adopted as the interrupt cycle so that the blinking caused by PWM is not visually recognized.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the control mode of the accessory control means 337. The numerical values in step S in the explanation of FIG. 11 will be used only in the explanation of this figure.

(Step S1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a predetermined interrupt period (for example, 4.17 msec) has arrived. As a result, if the predetermined interrupt cycle has arrived (YES in S1), the process moves to step S2, and if the predetermined interrupt cycle has not arrived (NO in S1), the process in step S1 is repeated. Note that the interrupt period of 4.17 msec is a value obtained by multiplying the system clock.

(Step S2)
The accessory control means 337 controls contents indicating a series of operations of the performance accessory device 202 in the performance indicated by the performance pattern, such as the direction of movement (rotation direction), amount of movement (amount of rotation), and speed of movement (rotation speed). The contents indicating at least one of the above are converted into device data (accessories data).

(Step S3)
The accessory control means 337 periodically outputs device data to the controller 342, and repeats the processing from step S1. The controller 342 drives the performance accessory device 202 according to the device data.

Note that the performance accessory device 202 has a slow reaction speed because it involves the movement of objects. For such a device with a slow reaction speed, processing is executed at a long cycle of 4.17 msec. In this way, other processing can be executed preferentially during a long period, so that processing time can be used effectively.

Here, an example has been described in which the state management unit 331 generates a message and includes the output timing to each device and the operation pattern of each device in the message. However, the present invention is not limited to such a case, and the message may be expressed as a 32-bit numerical string, for example, and the script associated with the message may include the output timing to each device and the operation pattern of each device. In this case, only the message is added to the operation buffer, and the device control means 332 analyzes the script associated with the message, analyzes each message accumulated in the operation buffer, and outputs the output timing included in the message. In response to the message, production data for operating each device is generated based on the operation pattern included in the message.

In addition, here, an example is given in which the state management means 331 generates a message for each device (main performance display section 200a, performance accessory device 202, performance lighting device 204, audio output device 206, performance operation device 208). As described above, for example, when the script includes the output timing to each device and the operation pattern of each device, the command contents of a plurality of devices can be included in one message. In this case, the device control means 332 analyzes the script associated with the message, analyzes each message accumulated in the operation buffer, and based on the output timing included in the message and the operation pattern included in the message. Therefore, the effect data for operating each device is generated at once.

Here, a series of functional units such as a sub CPU 330a, a sub RAM 330c, an image IC 340a, an image ROM 340b, an image RAM 340c, a controller 342, a music IC 346a, and a music ROM 346b are integrated into one integrated circuit as an SoC (System-on-a-Chip). are accumulated in. However, which functional units are integrated in such an SoC can be arbitrarily set. Further, each functional unit such as the sub CPU 330a, the sub RAM 330c, the image IC 340a, the image ROM 340b, the image RAM 340c, the controller 342, the music IC 346a, the music ROM 346b, etc. may be integrated as different integrated circuits and electrically connected.

Note that a power supply board (not shown) is connected to each board, and power is supplied to each board from a commercial power source via the power supply board. Further, the power supply board is provided with a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor.

FIG. 12 is an address map of the memory area used by the main CPU 300a according to the simultaneous operation reference example. Note that in FIG. 12, addresses are shown in hexadecimal numbers, and "H" indicates that they are hexadecimal numbers. As shown in FIG. 12, the memory area used by the main CPU 300a includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the main ROM 300b and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the main RAM 300c.

The memory area of the main ROM 300b includes a used area (0000H to 1BF3H) for storing programs and data for controlling the progress of the game, and an area other than the used area for processing for performing tests stipulated by gaming machine regulations. and an unused area (2000H to 2BFFH) for storing programs and data for executing processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184 (including processing for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184). and is provided.

The used areas of the main ROM 300b include a program area (0000H to 0A89H) where programs for controlling the progress of the game are stored, an unused area (0A8AH to 11FFH), and a data area (1200H) where data other than programs are stored. ~1BF3H) are provided. Note that the used area may not include unused areas (0A8AH to 0FFFH).

The unused area of the main ROM 300b includes a program area (2000H to 27FFH) in which programs for executing tests specified by gaming machine regulations and programs for displaying the performance display monitor 184 are stored; A data area (2800H to 2BFFH) is provided in which data other than these programs is stored.

In addition to the used and unused areas, the memory area of the main ROM 300b also includes an unused area (1A7BH to 1DFFH) and a ROM comment area (1E00H to 1EFFH) where arbitrary data such as program titles and versions are stored. ), an unused area (1F00H to 1FFFH), an unused area (2C00H to 2FBFH), and a program management area (2FC0H to 2FFFH) in which information necessary for the main CPU 300a to execute a program is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c consists of a used area (F000H to F1FFH) that is used temporarily when a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed, and an area other than the used area, which is specified by gaming machine regulations. An unused area (F210H to F228H) is provided that is used temporarily when a program for performing a specified test or for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is executed.

The used areas of the main RAM 300c include a work area (F000H to F12AH) used temporarily when a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed, an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H), and a work area (F12BH to F1D7H) used to control the progress of the game. A stack area (F1D8H to F1FFH) is provided for temporarily saving data during execution of a control program. Note that the used area may not include unused areas (F12BH to F1D7H).

The unused area of the main RAM 300c has a work area (F210H -F21FH), and a stack area (F220H to F228H) for temporarily saving data while these programs are being executed.

Furthermore, in addition to the used area and the unused area, the memory area of the main RAM 300c includes an unused area (F200H to F20FH) and an unused area (F229H to F3FFH).

In this way, the main ROM 300b and the main RAM 300c have areas used for controlling the progress of the game, processing for conducting tests specified by gaming machine regulations, and processing for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184. An unused area used for executing the process is provided separately.

In the main RAM 300c, a 16-byte unused area (F200H to F20FH) is provided between the used area and the unused area. This unused area (F200H to F20FH) is set as a boundary area that separates the used area and the unused area, and the boundary between the used area and the unused area is clear, and the program for controlling the progress of the game is When the program is executed, an unused area is used, and when the program is executed for the process to perform the test specified by the gaming machine regulations or the process to control the display of the performance display monitor 184. Prevents the used area from being used.

Note that the unused area provided between the used area and the unused area should be at least 1 byte or more, and from the perspective of fraud prevention, it is preferably 4 bytes or more, and it is set to 16 bytes or more. It is more desirable. Although data writing and reading are prohibited in the unused area, it may be cleared at a predetermined timing to prevent fraud.

Furthermore, an input/output unit is allocated to the memory space of FE00h to FEFFh. The input/output section will be described in detail later.

Next, a game in the gaming machine 100 as a reference example of simultaneous play will be explained together with various tables stored in the main ROM 300b.

As described above, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous play reference example, two types of games, a special game and a normal game, are played in parallel. In the special game, the game progresses in either the low probability game state or the high probability game state, and in the normal game, the game progresses in the game state of the non-time saving game state, the medium time saving game state, or the time saving game state. The game progresses.

The details of each gaming state will be described later, but a low probability gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of acquiring the right to execute a big prize game that opens a big prize opening is set low, and a high probability gaming state This is a gaming state in which the probability of acquiring the right to execute a big prize game is set high. In addition, the non-time-saving gaming state is a gaming state in which the movable piece 120b is difficult to open and the game ball is difficult to enter the first variable starting port 120B, and the medium-time-saving gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state. This is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be in the open state than in the state, and the game ball is more likely to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In addition, the time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be in the open state than the medium-time-saving game state, and the game ball is most likely to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the game balls continue to be fired toward the second game area 116b during the game, the game balls are set so that the number of game balls decreases slightly or the number of game balls does not decrease at all. .

As mentioned above, the special game and the normal game proceed simultaneously, so in the simultaneous play reference example, the low probability game state or high probability game state, the non-time saving game state, the medium time saving game state, the time saving game A gaming state is a combination of any of the states. In the following, for ease of understanding, the gaming states related to special games, i.e., low probability gaming states and high probability gaming states, will be referred to as special gaming states, and the gaming states related to normal games, i.e., non-time saving gaming states, medium The time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are sometimes called the normal gaming state. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state.

When the player operates the operation handle 112 to launch a game ball into the game area 116, and when the game ball flowing down the game area 116 enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, the player is prompted to play the game. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to award a profit (hereinafter referred to as a "major lottery"). In this big winning lottery, if you win a jackpot, the big winning opening will be opened and a big winning game will be executed in which you can enter the game ball into the big winning opening, and the game state after the big winning game is over. is set to one of the gaming states listed above. Below, the major prize lottery method will be explained.

Although details will be described later, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, various random numbers related to the big prize lottery (jackpot determining random number, winning symbol random number, reach group determining random number, reach A mode determination random number, a fluctuation pattern random number) are acquired, and each of these random numbers is stored in the special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c. Hereinafter, various random numbers stored in the special figure holding storage area when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 will be collectively referred to as special 1 holding, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 The various random numbers stored in the special figure reservation storage area are collectively called special 2 reservation.

The special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c includes a first special figure reservation storage area and a second special figure reservation storage area. The first special figure reservation storage area and the second special figure reservation storage area each have four storage units (first to fourth storage units). When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, the special 1 reservation is stored in order from the first storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, the special 2 reservations are stored in order from the first storage part of the second special figure reservation storage area.

For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, if no reservation is stored in any of the first to fourth storage sections of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first storage section Memorize special 1 reservation. Further, for example, if a game ball enters the first starting port 120 with the special 1 hold stored in the first to third storage units, the special 1 hold is stored in the fourth storage unit. Remember. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, the special 2 reservation is stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the second special symbol reservation storage area in the same manner as described above. The special 2 hold is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number (ordinal number) that is not listed.

However, the number of special 1 reservations (X1) and the number of special 2 reservations (X2) that can be stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area are each set to four. Therefore, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, if four special 1 reservations are already stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, the game ball enters the first starting port 120. Special 1 pending is not newly memorized due to the entry of the game ball. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, if four special 2 reservations are already stored in the second special figure reservation storage area, the game to the second starting port 122 is Special 2 suspension will not be newly memorized due to the ball entering the ball.

FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to a simultaneous play reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one jackpot determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0 to 65535. Then, when starting the big prize lottery, that is, when determining a jackpot, a jackpot determination random number determination table is selected according to the gaming state, and based on the selected jackpot determination random number determination table and the acquired jackpot determination random number. A major lottery will be held.

In the low-probability game state, when starting the big winning lottery for special 1 pending and special 2 pending, the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. Here, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, there are six levels of setting values with different degrees of advantage, and a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table is provided for each setting value. During the game, the setting value is set to one of six levels, and the random number judgment for determining a jackpot when the probability is low corresponds to the currently set setting value (registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer). A lottery is held with reference to the table.

In the low probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 13(a). will be held. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10218, it is determined to be a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined to be a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/300.6, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 2 (registered setting value = 2), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table b shown in FIG. 13(b). will be held. According to this low-probability jackpot decision random number determination table b, when the jackpot decision random number is between 10001 and 10225, it is determined to be a jackpot, when the jackpot decision random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/291.2, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 3 (registered setting value = 3), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table c shown in FIG. 13(c). will be held. According to this low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table c, when the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10232, it is determined to be a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined to be a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/282.4, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 4 (registered setting value = 4), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table d shown in FIG. 13(d). will be held. According to this low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table d, when the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10239, it is determined that it is a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined that it is a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/274.2, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 5 (registered setting value = 5), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table e shown in FIG. 13(e). will be held. According to this low-probability jackpot decision random number determination table e, when the jackpot decision random number is between 10001 and 10246, it is determined to be a jackpot, when the jackpot decision random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/266.4, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 6 (registered setting value = 6), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table f shown in FIG. 13(f). will be held. According to this low-probability jackpot decision random number determination table f, when the jackpot decision random number is between 10001 and 10253, it is determined to be a jackpot, when the jackpot decision random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/259.0, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a random number determination table for determining a jackpot at high probability according to a reference example of simultaneous play. In the high-probability gaming state, when starting the big winning lottery for special 1 pending and special 2 pending, the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. The high probability jackpot determination random number determination table is also provided for each set value, similar to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table.

In the high probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 14(a). will be held. According to this high probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10620, it is determined that it is a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined that it is a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/105.7, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

Similarly, in the high probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 2 to 6 (registered setting value = 2 to 6), the high probability jackpot shown in Fig. 14(b) to (f) A major prize lottery is performed with reference to the determined random number determination tables b to f. According to these high-probability jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f, a jackpot is determined when the respective jackpot determination random numbers are the values shown. Therefore, when the setting value is 2 to 6, the jackpot probability is about 1/102.4 to 1/91.0, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

As described above, the major prize lottery is performed according to the registered setting values. At this time, the probability of winning the jackpot differs depending on the registered setting value, and it is easier to win the jackpot when the registered setting value is large than when it is small. Note that here, even if the registered setting values are different, the probability of winning a small hit does not change, but the probability of winning a small winning may be changed for each registered setting value. Moreover, a small win is not essential, and only either a jackpot or a loss may be determined in the large prize lottery.

In addition, here, the probability of winning a jackpot in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is different depending on the registered setting value, but the probability of winning a jackpot in either the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state is Only the probability of winning may differ depending on the registered setting value.

FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a winning symbol random number determination table and a small winning symbol random number determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one winning symbol random number is obtained from within the range of 0 to 99. Then, when a determination result of "big hit" is derived from the above-mentioned big winning lottery, the type of special symbol is determined based on the acquired winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, if you win a "jackpot" by holding special 1, as shown in Figure 15 (a), the winning symbol random number determination table a for special 1 is selected, and if you win a "jackpot" by holding special 2 In this case, as shown in FIG. 15(b), the winning symbol random number determination table b for Toku 2 is selected, and if a "small win" is won by holding Toku 1, as shown in FIG. 15(c). , when the special 1 small winning symbol random number determination table a is selected and a "small hit" is won by special 2 reservation, the special 2 small winning symbol random number determination table a is selected as shown in FIG. 15(d). b is selected. Below, the special symbol determined by the winning symbol random number, that is, the special symbol determined when a jackpot determination result is obtained, is called a jackpot symbol, and the special symbol is determined when a small hit determination result is obtained. A special symbol is called a small hit symbol, and a special symbol determined when a loss determination result is obtained is called a loss symbol.

According to the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 15(a) and the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 15(b), depending on the value of the acquired winning symbol random number, As shown in the figure, jackpot symbols (special symbols A to J) are determined as special symbols. In addition, according to the special 1 small winning symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 15(c) and the special 2 small winning symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 15(d), the value of the acquired winning symbol random number Accordingly, as shown in the figure, small winning symbols (special symbols Z1 to Z6) are determined as special symbols.

In addition, when the big winning lottery result is a "loss" and the lottery result is derived by special 1 reservation, special symbol X is determined as a losing symbol without performing a lottery, and the lottery result is special 2 When the special symbol Y is derived by holding, the special symbol Y is determined as a losing symbol without performing a lottery. In other words, the winning symbol random number determination table is referred to only when the major prize lottery result is a "big hit", and is not referred to when the major prize lottery result is a "loss" or a "small win". Further, the small winning symbol random number determination table is referred to only when the large winning lottery result is a "small winning", and is not referred to when the large winning lottery result is a "big winning" or "loss". In addition, special symbols Z1 to Z6, which are small winning symbols, are collectively referred to simply as special symbol Z.

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a reach group determination random number determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. A plurality of reach group determination random number determination tables are provided, and a preset table is selected depending on the reservation type, the number of reservations, the gaming state, etc. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one reach group determining random number is obtained from within the range of 0 to 10006. As described above, when the major prize lottery result is derived, a process is performed to determine a variable performance pattern for notifying the major prize lottery result. In the simultaneous spinning reference example, when the big winning lottery result is a "lose", in determining the variable production pattern, the group type is first determined based on the reach group determination random number and the reach group determination random number determination table.

For example, if the gaming state is set to the normal state, which will be described in detail later, and a "lose" major prize lottery result is derived based on the special 1 pending, the special 1 pending is suspended when performing the major prize lottery. If the number (hereinafter simply referred to as "pending number") is 0, reach group determination random number determination table 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 16(a). Similarly, when the normal state is set, if a "losing" major prize lottery result is derived based on special 1 reservation, if the number of reserved prizes when performing the major prize lottery is 1 to 2, As shown in FIG. 16(b), if reach group determination random number determination table 2 is selected and the number of reservations is 3, reach group determination random number determination table 3 is selected as shown in FIG. 16(c). Ru. Note that in FIG. 16, the group x listed in the group type column indicates an arbitrary group number. Therefore, various group numbers will be determined as the group type depending on the acquired reach group determination random number and the type of reach group determination random number determination table to be referred to.

Here, we have explained the reach group determination random number determination table that is referred to when a "losing" big winning lottery result is derived based on special 1 pending in the normal state, but the main ROM 300b also contains A large number of reach group determination random number determination tables are also stored.

In addition, when the big winning lottery result is a "big hit" or a "small win", the group type is not determined when determining the variable performance pattern. In other words, the reach group determination random number determination table is referred to only when the big prize lottery result is a "lose", and is not referred to when the major prize lottery result is a "big win" or a "small win".

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a reach mode determination random number determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. This reach mode determination random number determination table is a loss reach mode determination random number determination table that is selected when the major prize lottery result is a "loss", and a jackpot determination table that is selected when the major prize lottery result is a "jackpot". It is roughly divided into a ready-to-win mode determination random number determination table and a small-win ready-to-win mode determination random number determination table that is selected when the large winning lottery result is a "small win." In addition, the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of a loss is provided for each group type determined as described above, and the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of a jackpot and the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of a small win are provided depending on the gaming state. , are provided for each reservation type.

Each reach mode determination random number determination table is also provided for each gaming state and symbol type. Here, an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of loss for group x that is referred to in a predetermined gaming state and symbol type is shown in FIG. FIG. 17(b) shows an example of the random number determination table for determining the reach mode at the time of a big hit for special 2, and FIG. 17(d) shows an example of the random number determination table for determining the reach mode at the time of a small hit for the special 1. 17(e) shows an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for Special 2 small hit.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one reach mode determining random number is obtained from within the range of 0 to 250. If the result of the above-mentioned big winning lottery is a "lose", as shown in FIG. A determination table is selected, and a variable mode number is determined based on the selected reach mode determination random number determination table in case of loss and the reach mode determination random number. In addition, if the result of the above-mentioned big winning lottery is a "jackpot", as shown in FIGS. A jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table is selected, and a variable mode number is determined based on the selected jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number.

Furthermore, if the result of the above-mentioned major lottery is a "small win", as shown in FIGS. A small hit reach mode determination random number determination table corresponding to is selected, and a variable mode number is determined based on the selected small win reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number.

In addition, in each reach mode determination random number determination table, the fluctuation pattern random number determination table described below is associated with the reach mode determination random number together with the fluctuation mode number, and at the same time as the fluctuation mode number is determined, the fluctuation pattern A random number determination table is determined. In addition, in FIG. 17, table x described in the column of variation pattern random number determination table indicates an arbitrary table number. Therefore, the fluctuation mode number and the table number of the fluctuation pattern random number determination table are determined according to the acquired reach group determination random number and the type of reach mode determination random number determination table to be referred to. In addition, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number, which will be described later, are set in hexadecimal numbers. In the following, "H" is added when indicating a hexadecimal number, but ○○H in FIGS. 17 to 19 indicates an arbitrary value indicated in hexadecimal.

As described above, when the winning lottery result is a "lose", the group type is first determined based on the reach group determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 16 and the reach group determination random numbers. Then, according to the determined group type and gaming state, a variable mode number and a variable pattern random number determination table are determined based on the reach-at-loss mode determination random number determination table and the reach-mode determination random number shown in FIG. 17(a).

On the other hand, if the big winning lottery result is a "big hit" or "small win", the determined jackpot symbol or small win symbol (type of special symbol), the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot or the small win, etc. With reference to the corresponding jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 17, the fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern random number determination table will be determined using the reach mode determination random number.

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern random number determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. Here, a fluctuation pattern random number determination table x for a predetermined table number x is shown, but many other fluctuation pattern random number determination tables are provided for each table number.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one fluctuation pattern random number is obtained from within the range of 0 to 238. Then, the variation pattern number is determined as shown in the figure based on the variation pattern random number determination table determined at the same time as the variation mode number and the obtained variation pattern random number.

In this way, when a major prize lottery is performed, a variable mode number and a variable pattern number are determined according to the major prize lottery result, the determined symbol type, the gaming state, the number of reservations, the reservation type, etc. These variable mode numbers and variable pattern numbers specify variable effect patterns, and are associated with the mode and time of the variable effect, respectively.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a variable time determination table according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. As described above, once the variation mode number is determined, the variation time 1 is determined according to the variation time 1 determination table shown in FIG. 19(a). According to this variation time 1 determination table, variation time 1 is associated with each variation mode number, and the corresponding variation time 1 is determined according to the determined variation mode number.

Further, as described above, when the variation pattern number is determined, the variation time 2 is determined according to the variation time 2 determination table shown in FIG. 19(b). According to this variation time 2 determination table, a variation time 2 is associated with each variation pattern number, and the corresponding variation time 2 is determined according to the determined variation pattern number. The total time of the fluctuation times 1 and 2 determined in this way becomes the time of the fluctuation performance for notifying the result of the big prize lottery, that is, the fluctuation time. This variation time is the time until the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

As will be described in detail later, when a special symbol is determined based on the special 1 hold, and a variation mode number and a variation pattern number, that is, a variation time, the first special symbol is displayed for the determined variation time. A variable display of symbols is performed on the device 160, and when a variable time has elapsed, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160. In addition, when a special symbol is determined based on the special 2 hold and a variation pattern number, that is, a variation time is determined, the variation display of the symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 162 over the determined variation time. When the variable time has elapsed, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162. At this time, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, so that the losing symbol is confirmed as a result of the big prize lottery, and the next major prize lottery based on special 1 reservation can be executed, and the losing symbol is the second special symbol. By being stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 162, a loss is confirmed as a result of the major prize lottery, and the next major prize lottery based on the special 2 hold can be executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, the jackpot is confirmed as a result of the big prize lottery, the big prize game is executed, and the small prize symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 160. When it is stopped and displayed on the symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, a small win is determined as a result of the large winning lottery, and a small win game is executed.

In this way, the fluctuation time defines the time for fluctuating display of the symbols on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, in other words, the time until the result of the big prize lottery is determined. Become.

When the fluctuation mode number is determined as described above, a fluctuation mode command corresponding to the determined fluctuation mode number is transmitted to the sub control board 330, and when the fluctuation pattern number is determined, the fluctuation mode command corresponding to the determined fluctuation mode number is transmitted to the sub control board 330. A variable pattern command corresponding to the pattern number is transmitted to the sub control board 330. In the sub-control board 330, based on the received variation mode command, the first half of the variation effect is mainly determined, and the second half of the variation production is mainly determined based on the received variation pattern command. The details will be described later. Note that hereinafter, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number may be collectively referred to as variation information, and the variation mode command and the variation pattern command may be collectively referred to as variation command.

FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating the gaming state and variable time according to a reference example of simultaneous play. As described above, the special game state and the normal game state are combined to form one game state, and the progress of the game is controlled according to the game state being set. As already explained, there are two types of special gaming states: a low probability gaming state and a high probability gaming state, which have different jackpot winning probabilities. In addition, the normal game state is divided into three types: a non-time-saving game state, a medium-time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state, which differ in the ease of entry of game balls into the first variable starting port 120B (entering frequency). It is being

Here, in the normal game, the ease with which a game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B is determined by three factors: winning probability, variable time, and opening time. Although details will be described later, in a normal game, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 or when a game ball enters the normal pattern operation opening 125, the normal pattern holding state is stored. Then, based on the stored standard pattern reservation, a standard pattern lottery is performed to determine whether or not to release the movable piece 120b. The result of this general drawing lottery is determined after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. When a winning result is determined as a result of the general drawing lottery, the movable piece 120b is released. At this time, the probability of winning in the normal drawing lottery, the variable time, and the opening time when the movable piece 120b is opened are set for each normal game state.

In the simultaneous play reference example, as shown in FIG. 20(a), six types of game states are provided by combinations of the special game state and the normal game state. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state. In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the winning probability in the general lottery is low, the fluctuation time is long, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is short. In the simultaneous play reference example, a gaming state in which a low probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined is called a normal state.

In addition, in the simultaneous play reference example, a high probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state may be set, and a gaming state in which both are combined is called the most dominant state. This most advantageous state has the highest degree of advantage among the six gaming states, and if you shoot the game balls properly, the number of game balls will gradually increase during the game even if you do not win the jackpot. It is set to go.

In addition, in the simultaneous play reference example, the low probability game state and the time saving game state may be set. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the winning probability in the general lottery is high, the fluctuation time is short, and the open time of the movable piece 120b is long. Below, a gaming state in which a low probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state are combined will be referred to as a low probability time saving state.

In addition, in the simultaneous play reference example, the high probability game state and the time saving game state may be set. Hereinafter, a gaming state in which a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state are combined will be referred to as a high probability time saving state or a high probability precursor state. Note that the highly accurate time saving state and the highly accurate precursor state will be described in detail later.

In addition, in the simultaneous play reference example, the high probability game state and the medium time saving game state may be set. In addition, in the medium time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the general lottery is higher than in the non-time-saving game state and lower than in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time is short, and the open time of the movable piece 120b is long. This gaming state can be set when an unexpected situation occurs, such as when the game ball is not launched properly. Hereinafter, a gaming state in which a high probability gaming state and a medium time saving gaming state are combined will be referred to as a penalty state.

In addition, in the sub-control board 330, a production mode corresponding to the gaming state set in the main control board 300 is set. The performance mode defines the background image, BGM, etc. displayed on the main performance display section 200a, and the content of the performance differs depending on the performance mode. In other words, the player can identify the current gaming state based on the presentation mode.

As mentioned above, in the simultaneous play reference example, six game states are provided. Then, as mentioned above, the fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern number, that is, the fluctuation time, are determined according to the gaming state when the big prize lottery is held, the reservation type, the number of fluctuations in the gaming state, and the symbol type. Ru.

Here, in the gaming machine 100, a substantial variable target is set for each gaming state. The actual variable object originally indicates the type of reservation for which the major prize lottery should be performed, and either special 1 reservation or special 2 reservation is set as the actual fluctuation object for each gaming state. Under normal conditions, special 1 reservation is set as subject to real fluctuation. Further, in the normal state, since the normal gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state, the first variable starting port 120B is hardly opened. Therefore, in the normal state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to cause the game ball to enter the first fixed starting port 120A.

In the normal state, a big winning lottery is carried out with special 1 reservation, which is actually subject to fluctuation, and when a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. In addition, in the normal state, when a big winning lottery is carried out with Toku 1 pending and a jackpot symbol is determined, a variable time is determined within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when a major prize lottery is carried out by special 2 reservation, which is not subject to actual fluctuation, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 minutes, regardless of the determined symbol type. In this way, by setting the variable time to a long time such as 10 minutes, in the normal state, even if the player enters the game ball into the second starting port 122, the big winning lottery based on special 2 reservation will not be possible. Opportunities for execution become extremely rare.

Specifically, the second starting port 122 is provided in the second gaming area 116b, and the second starting port 122 is configured as a fixed starting port into which a game ball can always enter. Further, due to the playability of the gaming machine 100, the second starting port 122 is arranged at a position where a game ball enters more easily than the first starting port 120. Therefore, if the variation time related to special 2 pending is made short in the normal state, the player will be given more chances to win the big prize lottery than necessary. Therefore, in accordance with the original gameplay in the normal state, the variable time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes in order to appropriately launch the game ball toward the first game area 116a.

In the most advantageous state, special 2 reservation is set as subject to real fluctuation. Therefore, in the most advantageous state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to cause the game ball to enter the second starting port 122. In the most advantageous state, when a major prize lottery is carried out by special 1 reservation, which is not actually subject to variation, the variation time is always determined to be 10 seconds, regardless of the determined symbol type. Furthermore, in the case where a major prize lottery is held using Toku 1 reservation, which is not subject to actual fluctuation in the most advantageous state, the game quality is improved compared to when a major prize lottery is performed by Toku 2 reservation, which is not subject to actual fluctuation in the normal state. The impact is small. Therefore, in the most advantageous state, the fluctuation time when a major prize lottery is performed due to special 1 reservation, which is not subject to actual fluctuation, is set as short as 10 seconds.

In the most advantageous state, a major prize lottery is carried out using special 2 hold, which is actually subject to fluctuation, and when a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 1 second to 3 seconds. In addition, in the most advantageous state, a big winning lottery is performed by special 2 reservation, and when a jackpot symbol is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds.

In both the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, special 1 reservation is set to be subject to actual fluctuation. In addition, in the low-accuracy time-saving state and the high-accuracy time-saving state, the normal game state is set to the time-saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to be in the open state. Therefore, in these two gaming states, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to cause the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In these two gaming states, the same variable pattern random number determination table is selected, but these two gaming states have in common that the normal gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In other words, when the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, when a big winning lottery is held with special 1 reservation, which is subject to actual fluctuation, and a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, the fluctuation time of 1 second is always determined. Ru. In addition, in the case of a low probability time saving state and a high probability time saving state, when a big winning lottery is carried out by special 1 reservation and a jackpot symbol is determined, the variable time is always determined to be 30 seconds.

In the high certainty precursor state, special 1 suspension is set as subject to real fluctuation. In addition, in the high certainty precursor state, the normal game state is set to the time-saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to be in the open state. Therefore, in the high probability precursor state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to cause the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In the high probability precursor state, a big winning lottery is carried out by special 1 reservation which is a real variable target, and when a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, a variable time is determined within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds. In addition, in the high certainty precursor state, when a big winning lottery is performed with special 1 pending and a jackpot symbol is determined, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 30 seconds.

On the other hand, in a low-probability time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state, and a high-probability portent state, that is, when the normal gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, if a big prize lottery is held by special 2 reservation, which is not subject to actual fluctuation, Regardless of the determined symbol type, the variation time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

In the penalty state, special 1 suspension is set to be subject to actual fluctuation. Further, in the penalty state, the normal game state is set to the medium time saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to be open at a constant frequency. Therefore, in the penalty state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to cause the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In the penalty state, a big winning lottery is carried out using special 1 hold, which is actually subject to fluctuation, and when a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. In addition, in the penalty state, when a big prize lottery is carried out by holding special 1 and a jackpot symbol is determined, a variable time is determined within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the penalty state, if a major prize lottery is carried out by special 2 reservation which is not actually subject to variation, the variation time is always determined to be 10 minutes, regardless of the determined symbol type.

As described above, a real variable target is set for each gaming state, and when a major prize lottery is performed based on the reservation type as a real variable target, the longest variable time is 100 seconds. On the other hand, when a major prize lottery is performed based on a reservation type that is not subject to actual fluctuation, the fluctuation time is approximately 10 minutes, and a game that is contrary to the original gameplay is prevented from being played.

In addition, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, we will explain the case where the average fluctuation time of the high-accuracy time-saving state is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the high-accuracy precursor state, but the average fluctuation time of the high-accuracy time-saving state is It may be longer than the average fluctuation time of the precursor state. In other words, the average of the fluctuation times of the highly reliable time saving state and the average of the fluctuation times of the highly reliable precursor state may be different.

FIG. 21 is a first diagram illustrating a special electric accessory operation ram set table according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation, and FIG. 22 is a first diagram illustrating a special electric accessory operation ram set table according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. It is a figure of 2. In addition, the special electric accessory actuation ram set table stores various data for controlling the big prize game or the small winning game, and during the big prize game or the small winning game, the special electric accessory actuating ram set table With reference to the table, the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c is controlled to be energized. In addition, in reality, there are multiple special electric accessory activation ram set tables for each type of special symbol (big winning symbol and small winning symbol), and the corresponding table is used as a major prize depending on the determined type of special symbol. Although it is set at the start of a game or a small winning game, here, for convenience of explanation, special symbol control data is shown for each symbol type.

As shown in FIG. 21, the big winning game consists of a plurality of round games in which the big prize opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the small winning game is a round game that is executed only once. According to this special electric accessory activation ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round game starts), the maximum number of special electric accessory activations (performed during one big prize game or small winning game) (number of round games to be played), number of special electric accessory opening/closing switches (number of openings of the grand prize opening during one round), solenoid energization time (first grand prize opening solenoid 126c or second grand prize opening for each number of openings of the grand prize opening) The energization time of the grand prize opening solenoid 128c, that is, the opening time of one grand prize opening), the specified number (the maximum possible number of prizes to the grand prize opening in one round game), the effective time for closing the grand prize opening (round Closing time of the big prize opening between games, that is, interval time), ending time (waiting time from the end of the last round game until the normal special game (variable symbol display described below) is resumed) However, as control data, each type of special symbol is stored in advance as shown in the figure.

Incidentally, when a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation and special symbols A, B, and D are determined as jackpot symbols, a big prize game consisting of four round games is executed. In this big winning game, each of the first big prize openings 126 is opened only once in the first to fourth round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter the ball during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. One big prize opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, when a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation and special symbols C and E are determined as jackpot symbols, a big prize game consisting of 10 round games is executed. In these big winning games, the first big prize opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter the ball during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. One big prize opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, when a small win is won due to special 1 retention and special symbols Z1 to Z3 are determined as the small win symbols, a small win game consisting of one round game is executed. In this small winning game, the second big prize opening 128 is opened once for 0.1 seconds in one round game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 22, if a jackpot is won by special 2 hold and special symbols F, G, and I are determined as jackpot symbols, a big prize game consisting of four round games is executed. Ru. In this big winning game, each of the first big prize openings 126 is opened only once in the first to fourth round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter the ball during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. One big prize opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, when a jackpot is won by special 2 holding and special symbols H and J are determined as jackpot symbols, a big prize game consisting of 10 round games is executed. In this big prize game, each of the first big prize openings 126 is opened only once in the first to tenth round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter the ball during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. One big prize opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, even when a small hit is won due to special 2 reservation and special symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined as the small winning symbols, a small winning game consisting of one round game is executed. Here, in the small winning game when the special symbol Z4 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second large prize opening 128 is opened twice for 0.1 seconds in one round game. Note that the in-round interval time, which is the pause time between opening the second big prize opening 128 twice, is set to 1.78 seconds. Since the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, considering the opening time of the second big prize opening 128 and the firing interval of the game balls, the game ball will win the second big prize during this small winning game. The probability of the ball hitting the opening 128 is low.

However, in the simultaneous play reference example, the game balls tend to stay on the movable piece 128b that maintains the second big prize opening 128 in the closed state, and when the movable piece 128b changes to the open state, the movable The game balls staying on the piece 128b are guided into the second big prize opening 128. Therefore, by opening the second grand prize opening 128 twice for 0.1 seconds, two to three game balls will enter the second grand prize opening 128 on average.

In addition, in a small winning game where the special symbol Z5 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second large prize opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds x 3 times in one round game. Note that the in-round interval time in this case is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small winning game, three to four game balls enter the second big prize opening 128 on average.

Further, in a small winning game in which the special symbol Z6 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second large prize opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds x 12 times in one round game. Note that the in-round interval time in this case is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small winning game, by continuing to fire game balls toward the second game area 116b, it is almost certain that a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the second big prize opening 128. can.

In addition, at the design stage of the gaming machine 100, it is necessary to strictly manage and adjust the firing prize ball ratio, which is the ratio between the number of game balls fired and the number of paid prize balls. Therefore, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, a special symbol Z4 is provided in which the opening for 0.1 seconds is made twice in the small winning game, and a special symbol Z5 is provided in which the opening is made for 0.1 seconds three times in the small winning game, By simply changing these selection ratios, the firing prize ball ratio can be easily adjusted and changed.

FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the big winning game according to the simultaneous play reference example. In the simultaneous play reference example, when a big prize game is executed, the game state setting table is referred to according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the reservation type, and the type of special symbol (jackpot symbol), and after the big prize game ends. Set the gaming state of.

When the game state at the time of winning a jackpot is a normal state or a penalty state, when winning a jackpot due to special 1 reservation which is subject to actual fluctuation, the game state after the jackpot game is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Specifically, when the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, a low probability time saving state is set (the special gaming state is a low probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is a time saving gaming state). At this time, the number of times the time-saving game state continues (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving number") is set to 100 times. This means that the time-saving gaming state continues until the major prize lottery is performed 100 times. However, the above-mentioned number of time-savings indicates the maximum number of continuations in the time-saving gaming state of 1, and if you win a jackpot before reaching the number of continuations mentioned above, the gaming state will be set again. That will happen. Therefore, when the time-saving gaming state is set after the end of the big prize game, if a jackpot lottery result is not derived in the time-saving gaming state and lottery results other than the jackpot are derived 100 times, the non-time-saving gaming state is set. The gaming state will be changed to (normal state).

Further, when special symbols B and D are determined as jackpot symbols, a high probability time saving state is set (the special gaming state is a high probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is a time saving gaming state). At this time, "next time" is set as the high probability number of times, and the high probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot is won. In addition, "next time" is set as the number of time saving times, and the time saving gaming state continues until the next jackpot is won. Therefore, when the special symbols B and D are determined, the highly accurate time-saving state continues after the big prize game until the next jackpot is won.

Further, when special symbols C and E are determined as jackpot symbols, a high probability precursor state is set (the special game state is a high probability game state, and the normal game state is a time saving game state). At this time, "next time" is set as the high accuracy number of times, and the time saving number of times is set to 100 times. When special symbols C and E are determined, the high probability game state continues until the next jackpot is won, while the time-saving game state ends after 100 times. Therefore, when special symbols C and E are determined, the gaming state will shift to the most advantageous state after the big prize game and when the result of the big prize lottery has been derived 100 times.

Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state or the penalty state, if the jackpot is won by special 2 reservation which is not subject to actual fluctuation, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as a jackpot symbol, the normal state is set (the special gaming state is a low probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state). Further, when special symbols G to J are determined as jackpot symbols, a penalty state is set (the special game state is a high probability game state, and the normal game state is a medium time saving game state). At this time, both the high-accuracy count and the time-saving count are set to "next time."

Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the most advantageous state, if the jackpot is won by special 1 reservation, which is not subject to actual fluctuation, the gaming state after winning the jackpot is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol A is determined as a jackpot symbol, a low probability time saving state is set (the special gaming state is a low probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is a time saving gaming state). At this time, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. Further, when the special symbols B to E are determined as the jackpot symbols, the game state after the big prize game is set in the same way as the normal state and the penalty state.

On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the most advantageous state, when winning the jackpot due to special 2 reservation which is subject to actual fluctuation, the gaming state after winning the jackpot game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as a jackpot symbol, a low probability time saving state is set (the special gaming state is a low probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is a time saving gaming state). At this time, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. Further, when special symbols G and I are determined as jackpot symbols, a high probability time saving state is set (the special game state is a high probability game state and the normal game state is a time saving game state). At this time, the high-accuracy count and the time-saving count are set to "next time."

Further, when special symbols H and J are determined as jackpot symbols, a high probability precursor state (the special game state is a high probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state) is set. At this time, the high accuracy number of times is set to "next time" and the time saving number of times is set to 100 times.

In addition, if the gaming state at the time of winning a jackpot is a low probability time saving state, a high probability time saving state, or a high probability premonitory state, that is, if the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state, the gaming state after the big winning game is the normal state. and penalty status.

FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a winning determination random number determination table according to a simultaneous play reference example. When a game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal operating port 125, it is associated with whether or not to control the energization of the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B. A normal symbol determination process (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is performed.

Although the details will be described later, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal pattern operation port 125, one winning determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0 to 99, and this random number is Numerical values are stored in the general figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c, with an upper limit of four. In other words, the common pattern holding storage area includes four storage sections for saving winning determination random numbers. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal pattern operation opening 125 with the determined random number stored in all four storage units of the normal pattern holding storage area, the game ball No winning random numbers are stored based on the passage of the ball. Hereinafter, the winning determination random number stored in the normal pattern holding storage area when a game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal pattern operation opening 125 will be referred to as normal pattern holding.

When starting the regular lottery when the normal gaming state is the non-time-saving gaming state, the winning determination random number determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state is referred to, as shown in FIG. 24(a). According to this winning random number determination table for non-time-saving gaming state, when the winning random number is 0, a winning symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol, and when the winning random number is 1 to 99, A losing symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that a winning symbol is determined in the non-time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100. As will be described in detail later, when a winning symbol is determined in this general lottery, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to be in the open state, and when a losing symbol is determined, the first variable starting port is opened. The movable piece 120b of the mouth 120B is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, when starting the regular lottery in the medium time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the winning determination random number determination table for the medium time saving game state is referred to. According to this winning random number determination table for the medium time saving game state, when the winning random number is between 0 and 49, a winning symbol is determined as a type of normal symbol, and when the winning random number is between 50 and 99. Then, a losing symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that a winning symbol is determined in the medium time saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 50/100.

Further, when starting the regular lottery in the time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 24(c), the winning determination random number determination table for the time-saving gaming state is referred to. According to this winning random number determination table for the time-saving gaming state, when the winning random number is 0 to 98, a winning symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol, and when the winning random number is 99, the winning symbol is determined as a normal symbol. A losing symbol is determined as the symbol type. Therefore, the probability that a winning symbol is determined in the time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 99/100.

FIG. 25(a) is a diagram illustrating a normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 25(b) is a diagram illustrating an opening/closing control pattern table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. As described above, when the ordinary symbol lottery is performed, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined. The normal symbol fluctuation time data table is referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the normal symbol when a winning symbol or a losing symbol is determined by the regular symbol lottery. According to this normal symbol variation time data table, when the gaming state is set to the non-time saving gaming state and the medium time saving gaming state, the variation time is determined to be 10 seconds, and when the gaming state is set to the time saving gaming state. If so, the variation time is determined to be 1 second. When the variable time is determined in this manner, the normal symbol display 168 is displayed in a variable manner (blinking display) over the determined time. Then, when a winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 lights up, and when a losing symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off.

Then, when the winning symbol is determined by the ordinary symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol display 168 lights up, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B performs opening/closing control as shown in FIG. 25(b). The energization is controlled by referring to the pattern table. In fact, the opening/closing control pattern table is provided for each gaming state, and depending on the gaming state when the normal symbol is determined, the corresponding table is set when the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c starts. .

When the winning symbol is determined, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the opening/closing of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled with reference to the opening/closing control pattern table. According to this opening/closing control pattern table, the time before normal electric opening (the waiting time until opening of the first variable starting port 120B starts), the maximum number of switching times for normal electric accessories (opening of the first variable starting port 120B), number of times), solenoid energization time (the energization time of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c for each number of times the first variable starting port 120B is opened, that is, the opening time of the first variable starting port 120B once), the specified number (the first variable maximum number of prizes that can be won in the first variable starting port 120B while the starting port 120B is fully open), normal power closing effective time (closing time between each opening of the first variable starting port 120B, that is, rest time), normal power Valid state time (wait time from the end of the last opening of the first variable starting port 120B), normal power end wait time (wait until the normal symbol fluctuation display, which will be described later, is resumed after the normal power valid state time has elapsed) time) is stored in advance as control data for the first variable starting port 120B for each gaming state as shown in the figure.

In this way, by setting the winning probability of the normal symbol, the variable time, and the opening time, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the player when game balls enter the first variable starting port 120B, the second starting port 122, the normal pattern operating port 125, and the big winning port) is the number of balls fired in the non-time saving gaming state. : Number of prize balls = 100:20, number of fired balls: number of prize balls = 100:40 in the medium time saving game state, number of fired balls: number of prize balls = 100:99 in the time saving game state.

The opening/closing conditions of the first variable starting port 120B define three elements: the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time of variable display of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the first variable starting port 120B. In other words, by combining the three elements of the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time of variable display of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the first variable starting port 120B, in each of the non-time-saving gaming state, the intermediate time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state, It is possible to set the frequency of game balls entering the first variable starting port 120B and the firing prize ball ratio. In any case, the combination of the three elements shown here is just an example, and if you combine the three elements so that the firing prize ball ratio is higher in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state, good.

FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating the transition of the gaming state according to the original gaming nature according to the simultaneous play reference example. With the above configuration, the gaming machine 100 realizes the following gaming experience. Note that here, a case will be described in which the registration setting value is set to "1". First, in the initial state of the gaming machine 100, it is set to the normal state shown in FIG. 26(a). In the normal state, since the actual variable target is set to special 1 pending, the player shoots the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to enter the game ball into the first fixed starting port 120A. Since the first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game board 108, the player will play what is called "left-handed play" in the normal state.

When a game ball enters the first fixed starting port 120A, special 1 reservation is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area. The special 1 reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area are sequentially read out when the starting condition is met, and a big prize lottery is performed based on the read special 1 reservations. At this time, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/300.6. In the normal state, a game is played with the aim of winning a jackpot in the big winning lottery based on this special 1 reservation. Note that the firing prize ball ratio when the game balls are fired toward the first game area 116a is set to 100:20, and the number of game balls will decrease during the game.

Then, in the normal state, when a jackpot is won in the big winning lottery by special 1 reservation, the big winning game is executed. In this big winning game, a round game in which the first big prize opening 126 is opened is executed 4 or 10 times, and the player can win prize balls for 4 or 10 rounds. When a jackpot is won due to special 1 retention, one of the special symbols A to E is determined as the jackpot symbol.

In the normal state, when the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is the special symbol A, the gaming state after the big winning game becomes a low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 26(b). When winning a jackpot with special 1 pending, the probability that special symbol A will be determined as the jackpot symbol is 30%. Therefore, if the player wins a jackpot in the normal state, there is a 30% probability that the gaming state will shift to the low probability time saving state. In the low-probability time-saving state, the actual variable target is set to special 1 pending, but since the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the player enters the first variable start opening 120B with the game ball. 2. The player will hit the ball to the right aiming at the 2 game area 116b.

That is, in this low-probability time-saving state, as in the normal state, a game is played with the aim of winning a jackpot in the big winning lottery based on special 1 reservation. Note that in the low-probability time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/300.6, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the movable piece 120b is frequently in the open state. Therefore, the firing prize ball ratio is 100:99, and the player can aim for a jackpot while reducing consumption of game balls.

In addition, when shifting to the low probability time saving state, the number of time saving times is set to 100, and if the jackpot is not won in the 100 big winning lottery, the gaming state will change to the normal state again (time saving exit) ).

In addition, in the normal state, if the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 are special symbols B and D, the gaming state after the big prize game is the high accuracy time saving shown in FIG. 26(c). state. When winning a jackpot with special 1 pending, the probability that special symbols B and D will be determined as jackpot symbols is 35%. Therefore, if the player wins a jackpot in the normal state, there is a 35% probability that the gaming state will shift to the high-accuracy time-saving state. In the high-accuracy time-saving state, the actual variable target is set to special 1 pending, but since the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the player enters the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. 2. The player will hit the ball to the right aiming at the 2 game area 116b.

That is, in this high probability time saving state, as in the normal state, a game is played with the aim of winning a jackpot in the big winning lottery based on special 1 reservation. In addition, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/105.7, and since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the movable piece 120b is frequently opened. Therefore, the firing prize ball ratio is 100:99, and the player can perform the big winning lottery while reducing the consumption of game balls. Therefore, in the high probability time saving state, it can be said that the winning of the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed.

In addition, in the normal state, if the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 are special symbols C and E, the gaming state after the big winning game is a high probability precursor as shown in FIG. 26(d). state. When winning a jackpot with special 1 pending, the probability that special symbols C and E will be determined as jackpot symbols is 35%. Therefore, if the player wins a jackpot in the normal state, there is a 35% probability that the gaming state will shift to the high-predictability precursor state. In the high certainty precursor state, the actual variable target is set to special 1 pending, but since the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state, the player enters the first variable starting port 120B with the first variable. 2. The player will hit the ball to the right aiming at the 2 game area 116b.

When the special symbols C and E are determined, a highly accurate precursor state is set and the time saving number is set to 100 times. At this time, when the number of fluctuations after the big prize game reaches 100, the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state becomes a non-time-saving game state. As a result, due to the time saving, the gaming state shifts to the most advantageous state shown in FIG. 26(e). As will be described in detail later, in the most dominant state, the number of game balls can be increased by simply continuing to shoot the game balls toward the second game area 116b. Therefore, in the high probability precursor state, the purpose of the game is not to win the jackpot, but to save time without winning the jackpot.

According to the above-mentioned special 1 suspension of real fluctuation objects in the high probability precursor state, high probability time saving state, and low probability time saving state, when a jackpot is won, special symbols A to E are determined as jackpot symbols. When the special symbol A is determined, four round games are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes a low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 26(b). Further, when special symbols B and D are determined, 4 or 10 round games are executed in the big prize game, and the gaming state after the big prize game becomes a high-accuracy time-saving state. Further, when the special symbols C and E are determined, four or ten round games are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes a high probability precursor state.

In the most dominant state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, special 2 reservation is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area. The special 2 reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area are sequentially read out when the starting condition is met, and a big prize lottery is performed based on the read special 2 reservations. At this time, the winning probability of the jackpot is set to about 1/105.7, and the winning probability of the small winning is set to about 1/3.45. In the most advantageous state, the main purpose of the game is to win the small prize in the major prize lottery based on this special 2 reservation.

Specifically, when game balls are fired into the second game area 116b, the ratio of prize balls paid out by entering the game balls into the second starting port 122 to the number of fired balls is 100:60 to 80. It is set to about. In the most advantageous state, small winning games are frequently played because the probability of winning a small winning is about 1/3.45 in the special lottery with special 2 reservation. Here, if a small hit is won due to special 2 reservation, small winning symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined. As described above, in the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, an average of 2 to 3 game balls enter the second large prize opening 128. In the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z5 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, an average of 3 to 4 game balls enter the second large prize opening 128. Furthermore, in the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, almost a specified number of game balls enter the second large winning hole 128.

When a game ball enters the second large winning hole 128, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out for each game ball that enters. As a result, in the most dominant state, the firing prize ball ratio, which is the ratio of the number of all prize balls to the number of firing balls, is 100:120, and by simply continuing to fire the game balls toward the second game area 116b, the game ball can be increased.

In addition, in this most dominant state, the normal game state has become a non-time-saving game state, and the movable piece 120b is almost never in the open state. In addition, in the most advantageous state, the special gaming state is a high probability game state, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the most advantageous state is about 1/105.7, so in the most advantageous state, the next It can be said that winning the jackpot is guaranteed.

According to the special 2 reservation of the real variable object in this most dominant state, when a jackpot is won, special symbols F to J are determined as jackpot symbols. When the special symbol F is determined, four round games are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes a low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 26(b). Further, when the special symbols G and I are determined, 4 or 10 round games are executed in the big prize game, and the gaming state after the big prize game becomes a high-accuracy time-saving state. Further, when the special symbols H and J are determined, 4 or 10 round games are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes a high probability precursor state.

Since the most advantageous state has an extremely high degree of advantage compared to other gaming states, the main purpose of the game in the gaming machine 100 is to shift the gaming state to the most advantageous state. As mentioned above, the game is first started in the normal state, but the normal state does not shift to the most advantageous state all at once. Therefore, the transition route of transitioning to the most dominant state via the high probability precursor state is the transition route to the most dominant state in gaming machine 100.

Furthermore, in the simultaneous spinning reference example, apart from the time-saving exit in the high-precision precursor state, winning a specific small winning symbol is set as a transition condition from the high-precision precursor state to the most advantageous state. Specifically, if you win a small hit with special 1 reservation, which is a real fluctuation target in a high probability precursor state, the special symbol Z1 will be 1%, the special symbol Z2 will be 69%, and the special symbol Z3 will be 30% as the small winning symbol. % probability (see FIG. 15(c)).

At this time, when the special symbol Z1 is determined as the small winning symbol, the time saving game state ends with the end of the small winning game, and as a result, the gaming state shifts to the most advantageous state.

In this way, since the player moves to the most advantageous state upon winning a specific small win, the player is This always creates a sense of anticipation and tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned high probability precursor state, high probability time saving state, and low probability time saving state, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/3.45. Therefore, even in the high probability precursor state, the high probability time saving state, and the low probability time saving state, small winning games are frequently executed as in the most advantageous state. However, in the high probability precursor state, the high probability time saving state, and the low probability time saving state, the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state. Further, as will be described in detail later, the normal game state is maintained in the time-saving game state even during the small winning game. Therefore, although the second large prize opening 128 is opened during the small winning game, the first variable starting opening 120B is also opened during this time.

As described above, the first variable starting opening 120B is provided above the second big winning opening 128, and in the time-saving gaming state, the opening time of the first variable starting opening 120B is longer than the second big winning opening. It is much longer than the opening time of the mouth 128. Therefore, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the high-accuracy time-saving state, and the low-accuracy time-saving state, most of the game balls flowing down the second gaming area 116b enter the first variable starting opening 120B and enter the second big prize opening 128. Game balls almost never enter the ball. As a result, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the high-accuracy time-saving state, and the low-accuracy time-saving state, unlike the most dominant state, the number of game balls will gradually decrease even if you hit right during the game.

As mentioned above, when the game progresses with the real variable object in accordance with the original gameplay, if you win a jackpot, the gaming state after the big winning game will be a low probability time saving state, a high probability time saving state, a high probability premonitory state. Set to either. The high-probability time-saving state and the high-probability portent state have in common that the special game state is a high-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state. On the other hand, the high-accuracy time-saving state continues until the next jackpot is won, whereas the high-accuracy precursor state is when the game is stopped by winning a specific small win (special symbol Z1) or exiting the time-saving state. The difference is that the state is shifted to the most dominant state.

In addition, in the high accuracy time saving state, the fluctuation time for small hits and losses is set to 1 second, whereas in the high accuracy precursor state, the fluctuation time for small wins and losses is set to 3 to 10 seconds. The difference is that it is set within a range (see FIG. 20(b)). That is, the average of the fluctuation times in the high certainty time saving state is set to be shorter than the average fluctuation time in the high certainty precursor state.

Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, since the fluctuation time at the time of a small win and a loss is relatively short, it is possible to digest the actual fluctuation targets at a high speed until winning the jackpot. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, during the special symbol variation time, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a variable manner on the sub-control board 330. In the highly accurate time saving state, the variable display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c also becomes relatively short. Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, as long as the special 1 reservation continues to be memorized, the special 1 reservation (fluctuating display of production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c) will continue to be consumed at a high speed, and the time until winning the jackpot will be reduced. This allows the player to play the game until the next jackpot without feeling (reduced) stress.

On the other hand, in the highly accurate precursor state, the fluctuation time at the time of a small hit and a loss is relatively long, but the sub-control board 330 performs an effect as to whether or not the state will shift to the most advantageous state. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the state will shift to the most advantageous state.

In this way, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, even if you win a specific small hit (special symbol Z1), it will not shift to the most advantageous state, but by setting the average fluctuation time short, the next big hit It is possible to shorten the time it takes to win a game and reduce stress on the player. In addition, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the average fluctuation time is set longer than in the high-accuracy time-saving state, but the fluctuation time can be used to determine whether or not to move to the most advantageous state, and the game This can give people a sense of anticipation and tension.

As described above, there are a high-probability time-saving state and a high-probability portent state in which the special game state is a high-probability game state and the normal game state is a time-saving game state, and changes in the high-probability time-saving state are provided. By making the average time shorter than the average fluctuating time of the high-predictability precursor state, new gaming features can be provided.

FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating the transition of the game state when the game is not played properly according to the simultaneous play reference example. As described above, in the gaming machine 100, the variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display 160 and the variable display of symbols on the second special symbol display 162 are performed simultaneously and in parallel. At this time, in the case where there is a possibility that the player will be disadvantaged as a result of a big winning lottery being held due to suspension of items other than those subject to actual fluctuation, the fluctuation time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes. However, after the big winning lottery is held due to reservations other than the actual fluctuation targets, for example, as a result of interrupting the game, a jackpot due to reservations other than the actual fluctuation targets may be confirmed. In this case, the gaming state will change as shown in FIG. 27.

Below, the main processing of the main control board 300 for realizing the above-mentioned gaming properties will be explained.

FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine status flag according to a reference example of simultaneous play. In the main control board 300, whether or not the game can be played is managed by a gaming machine status flag. The gaming machine status flag is set to one of six flag values from 00H to 05H. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 00H indicates a gaming enabled state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 00H, the progress of the game is controlled, and when the gaming machine status flag is other than 00H, the game is stopped. will be stopped.

The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=01H indicates a setting change state, and when the gaming machine state flag is 01H, the registered setting value can be changed. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 02H indicates the setting confirmation status, and when the gaming machine status flag is 02H, the registered setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 184, etc. It becomes possible to confirm. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag=03H indicates an abnormal setting state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 03H, the registered setting value is considered abnormal and the game is stopped. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag=04H indicates a RAM abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 04H, the game is stopped. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag=05H indicates a checksum abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 05H, the game is stopped. When the power is turned on, the gaming machine status flag is set to one of the flag values, and processing according to the gaming machine status flag is performed.

(CPU initialization process of main control board 300)
FIG. 29 is a first flowchart illustrating the CPU initialization process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous running reference example, and FIG. 30 is a first flowchart illustrating the CPU initialization process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous running reference example. FIG.

When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 300a, and the main CPU 300a performs the following CPU initialization process (S100).

(Step S100-1)
When the main CPU 300a is powered on, the main CPU 300a reads a startup program from the main ROM 300b as an initial setting process and performs setting processes necessary to execute various processes.

(Step S100-3)
The main CPU 300a sets a wait processing time in a timer counter.

(Step S100-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off notice signal is detected. Note that the main control board 300 is provided with a power-off detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, a power-off warning signal is output from the power-off detection circuit. If a power cutoff notice signal is detected, the process moves to step S100-3, and if a power cutoff notice signal is not detected, the process moves to step S100-7.

(Step S100-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the wait time set in step S100-3 above has elapsed. As a result, if it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the process moves to step S100-9, and if it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed, the process moves to step S100-5.

(Step S100-9)
Main CPU 300a executes necessary processing to permit access to main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag before power-off into the D register.

(Step S100-13)
The main CPU 300a calculates a checksum, and determines whether the calculated checksum matches (is normal) the checksum saved when the power is turned off, and whether the backup flag is normal. As a result, if it is determined that the backup flag and the checksum are normal, the process moves to step S100-15, and if it is determined that either one or both are not normal, the process moves to step S100-25. .

(Step S100-15)
The main CPU 300a sets an address that does not include the set value and gaming machine status flag as the start address of the main RAM 300c to be cleared.

(Step S100-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s (whether the RAM clear button is pressed). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal is input, the process moves to step S100-31, and if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal is not input, the process moves to step S100-19. .

(Step S100-19)
The main CPU 300a checks whether the flag value of the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-11 is 00H (playable state), the setting change switch 180s is on, and the middle frame 104 is open. judge. As a result, if it is determined that all three conditions are satisfied, the process moves to step S100-21, and if it is determined that even one of the three conditions is not satisfied, the process moves to step S100-23.

(Step S100-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine status flag to 02H (setting confirmation status). That is, if the power is turned on normally with the middle frame 104 open, the setting change switch 180s turned on, and the RAM clear button not pressed, the setting confirmation state is entered.

(Step S100-23)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process to clear the area of the main RAM 300c after the start address set in step S100-15, which is to be cleared when the power is restored, and moves the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-25)
The main CPU 300a sets 05H (checksum abnormal state) in the D register.

(Step S100-27)
The main CPU 300a performs an out-of-area read/write check process that checks and clears the read/write memory in the out-of-use area.

(Step S100-29)
The main CPU 300a sets an address including the setting value and the gaming machine status flag to the top address of the main RAM 300c to be cleared.

(Step S100-31)
The main CPU 300a checks and clears the read/write memory of the used area.

(Step S100-33)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the check result of the read/write memory in step S100-31 is normal. As a result, if it is determined that it is normal, the process moves to step S100-37, and if it is determined that it is not normal, the process moves to step S100-35.

(Step S100-35)
The main CPU 300a sets 04H (RAM abnormal state) in the D register, and moves the process to step S100-45.

(Step S100-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether 02H (setting confirmation state) is set in the D register. As a result, if it is determined that 02H is set, the process moves to step S100-39, and if it is determined that 02H is not set, the process moves to step S100-41.

(Step S100-39)
The main CPU 300a sets 00H (game ready state) in the D register.

(Step S100-41)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change conditions are satisfied. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change conditions are satisfied, the process moves to step S100-43, and if it is determined that the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the process moves to step S100-45. Here, the setting change conditions include at least that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, that the middle frame 104 is open, and that a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s. included.

(Step S100-43)
The main CPU 300a sets 01H (setting change state) in the D register.

(Step S100-45)
The main CPU 300a saves the value set in the D register to the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-47)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process to clear the items to be cleared when clearing the RAM in the main RAM 300c, and moves the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-49)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for transmitting a payout command (RAM clear designation command) (stores the RAM clear designation command in a transmission buffer) for transmitting to the payout control board 310 that the main RAM 300c has been cleared.

(Step S100-51)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-53)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-51 is 00H (playable status). As a result, if it is determined that it is 00H, the process moves to step S110, and if it is determined that it is not 00H, the process moves to step S100-55.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a performs subcommand group setting processing. Note that this subcommand group set processing will be described later.

(Step S100-55)
The main CPU 300a performs a sub-command group setting process for transmitting a predetermined command to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S100-57)
The main CPU 300a sets the cycle of timer interrupts.

(Step S100-59)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to prohibit interrupts.

(Step S100-61)
The main CPU 300a updates the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number. In addition, the initial value update random number for the winning pattern random number is for determining the initial value and end value of the winning pattern random number. In other words, when the winning pattern random number goes through one round from the initial value update random number for the winning pattern random number to -1 the initial value update random number for the winning pattern random number by the updating process of the winning pattern random number described later, the winning pattern random number at that time It will be updated to the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number.

(Step S100-63)
The main CPU 300a analyzes the received data (main command) received from the payout control board 310, and executes various processes according to the received data.

(Step S100-65)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for transmitting sub-commands stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S100-67)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit interrupts.

(Step S100-69)
The main CPU 300a updates the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, and thereafter repeats the process from step S100-59. In addition, below, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation performance pattern are collectively referred to as the random number for fluctuation performance.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating subcommand group setting processing (S110) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous execution reference example.

(Step S110-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S110-3)
The main CPU 300a performs a sub-command group setting process for transmitting a predetermined command to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S110-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a model command setting process to set a model command indicating model information of the gaming machine 100 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-7)
The main CPU 300a performs a setting value designation command setting process to set a setting value designation command indicating a registered setting value in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 1 reservation designation command setting process that sets a special figure 1 reservation designation command indicating the number of special 1 reservations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 2 reservation designation command setting process that sets a special figure 2 reservation designation command indicating the number of special 2 reservations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a number command setting process to set a number command indicating the remaining number of times in the time saving gaming state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a variation pattern selection state designation command setting process that sets a variation pattern selection state designation command indicating a variation pattern selection state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure phase designation command setting process that sets a special figure phase designation command indicating a special game management phase in the transmission buffer. The special game management phase will be described later.

(Step S110-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is in a special symbol change waiting state. As a result, if it is determined that it is in the special symbol change waiting state, the process moves to step S110-21, and if it is determined that it is not in the special symbol change waiting state, the subcommand group set process is ended.

(Step S110-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the customer waiting designation command in the transmission buffer, and ends the subcommand group setting process.

Next, interrupt processing in the main control board 300 will be explained. Here, the power-off saving process (XINT interrupt process) and timer interrupt process will be explained.

(Evacuation processing at power-off of main control board 300 (XINT interrupt processing))
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating the power-off saving process (XINT interrupt process) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous operation reference example. The main CPU 300a monitors the power-off detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, interrupts the CPU initialization process and executes the power-off save process.

(Step S300-1)
When the power-off notice signal is input, the main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S300-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off notice signal.

(Step S300-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off notice signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that a power-off notice signal has been detected, the process moves to step S300-11, and if it is determined that a power-off notice signal has not been detected, the process moves to step S300-7. .

(Step S300-7)
The main CPU 300a restores the register.

(Step S300-9)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit interrupts, and ends the power-off save processing.

(Step S300-11)
The main CPU 300a executes output port clear processing to stop output from the output port.

(Step S300-13)
The main CPU 300a executes checksum setting processing to calculate and save a checksum.

(Step S300-15)
The main CPU 300a executes RAM protect setting processing necessary to prohibit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S300-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a predetermined number of times the power outage detection signal has been detected to the counter value of the loop counter in order to set the power outage occurrence monitoring time.

(Step S300-19)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off notice signal.

(Step S300-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off notice signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that a power-off notice signal has been detected, the process moves to step S300-17, and if it is determined that a power-off notice signal has not been detected, the process moves to step S300-23. .

(Step S300-23)
The main CPU 300a subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter set in step S300-17 above.

(Step S300-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the loop counter is not zero. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process moves to step S300-19, and if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process moves to the above-described CPU initialization process (step S100).

Note that if the power is actually cut off, the operation of the gaming machine 100 is stopped while the steps S300-17 to S300-25 are looped.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 300)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous operation reference example. The main control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit that generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds in the simultaneous running reference example, hereinafter referred to as "4ms"). When a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the CPU initialization process (step S100) is interrupted and the following timer interrupt process is executed.

(Step S400-1)
The main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S400-3)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit interrupts.

(Step S400-5)
The main CPU 300a outputs the common data set in the common output buffer to the output port, and outputs the first special symbol display 160, the second special symbol display 162, the first special symbol reservation display 164, and the second special symbol reservation. Dynamic port output processing is executed to control the lighting of the display 166, normal symbol display 168, normal symbol pending display 170, right hit notification display 172, and performance display monitor 184.

(Step S400-7)
The main CPU 300a reads various input port information and executes port input processing to accurately obtain the latest switch status.

(Step S400-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S400-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 00H (playable state). As a result, if it is determined that it is 00H, the process moves to step S400-15, and if it is determined that it is not 00H, the process moves to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 above is equal to or greater than 03H (setting abnormal state). As a result, if it is determined that it is 03H or more, the process moves to step S400-29, and if it is determined that it is not 03H or more, the process moves to step S450.

(Step S450)
The main CPU 300a executes setting-related processing and moves the processing to step S400-29. Note that the setting-related processing will be described later.

(Step S400-15)
The main CPU 300a performs timer update processing to update various timer counters. Here, unless otherwise specified, the various timer counters are decremented each time the main control board 300 performs timer interrupt processing, and when they reach 0, they stop decrementing.

(Step S400-17)
The main CPU 300a executes the process of updating the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number, as in step S100-61 above.

(Step S400-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of updating the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is incremented by 1 and updated, and if the added result exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter has completed one cycle, the current Update the random number from the initial value update random number for winning symbol random number.

Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the jackpot determination random number and the hit determination random number use hardware random numbers that are updated by a hardware random number generation section built into the main control board 300. The hardware random number generator updates both the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number according to certain rules, automatically changes the random number sequence every time the random number sequence goes around, and updates the starting value every time the system is reset. It is changing.

(Step S500)
The main CPU 300a includes a first fixed starting opening detection switch 120As, a first variable starting opening detection switch 120Bs, a second starting opening detection switch 122s, a gate detection switch 124s, a regular figure operation opening detection switch 125s, and a first big winning opening detection switch. 126s, a switch management process is executed to determine whether or not a signal is input from the second big winning opening detection switch 128s. Note that details of this switch management processing will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the variable display of special symbols based on the special 2 hold of the special game. The details of this special game management process will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the variable display of special symbols based on special 1 suspension of the special games. In addition, here, the same program (module) as the special game management process for controlling the progress of the variable display of special symbols based on special 2 reservation is read out, and the same program (module) as the special game management process for controlling the progress of the variable display of special symbols based on special 1 reservation is read out. Special game management processing for control will be executed.

(Step S700)
The main CPU 300a executes special electric accessory game management processing for controlling the progress of the big winning game and the small winning game in the special game. The details of this special electric accessory game management process will be described later.

(Step S800)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal game management process for controlling the progress of the above-mentioned normal game. The details of this normal game management process will be described later.

(Step S400-21)
The main CPU 300a executes error management processing for determining various errors and making settings according to the error determination results.

(Step S400-23)
The main CPU 300a checks the general winning opening detection switch 118s, the first starting opening detection switch 120s, the second starting opening detection switch 122s, the first big winning opening detection switch 126s, and the second big winning opening detection switch 128s, and detects the corresponding The prize opening switch process is executed to increment the counter etc. for prize ball control.

(Step S400-25)
The main CPU 300a executes a payout control management process for creating and transmitting a payout command based on the counter value of the prize ball control counter set in step S400-23 above.

(Step S400-27)
The main CPU 300a is a firing command for transmitting a firing position designation command to the sub control board 330, which instructs the firing position of the game ball, that is, to which of the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b the game ball is to be fired. Execute location specification management processing.

(Step S400-29)
The main CPU 300a executes an external information management process for setting output data for external information to be output from the game information output terminal board 312 to the outside.

(Step S400-31)
The main CPU 300a includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol pending display 164, a second special symbol pending display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol pending display 170. , executes an LED display setting process in which display data for controlling the lighting of various indicators (LEDs) such as the right-handed hit notification display 172 is set in the output buffer corresponding to each common.

(Step S400-33)
The main CPU 300a synthesizes the solenoid output images of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c, the first big winning hole solenoid 126c, and the second big winning hole solenoid 128c, and executes a solenoid output image synthesis process for storing the synthesized image in the output port buffer. .

(Step S400-35)
The main CPU 300a executes port output processing for outputting the common output buffer value stored in each output port buffer to the output port.

(Step S400-37)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to prohibit interrupts.

(Step S400-39)
The main CPU 300a uses the unused area of the main RAM 300c to perform processing for calculating a base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and to common data for displaying the calculated base ratio on the performance display monitor 184. Execute performance display monitor control processing to set in the output buffer. Note that in the performance display monitor control process, the base ratio is calculated every predetermined period. Here, the base ratio of the current period and the base ratio of the previous period may be switched and displayed on the performance display monitor 184 at predetermined time intervals. Further, the base ratio displayed on the performance display monitor 184 may be switched in accordance with a predetermined operation.

(Step S400-41)
The main CPU 300a restores the register and ends the timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating the setting-related processing (S450) according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S450-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value of the gaming machine status flag is 01H (setting change status). As a result, if it is determined that it is 01H, the process moves to step S450-3, and if it is determined that it is not 01H, the process moves to step S450-15.

(Step S450-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered setting values stored in the setting value buffer into a predetermined processing area.

(Step S450-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the RAM clear switch 182s is pressed (whether a RAM clear operation signal is input). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s is pressed, the process moves to step S450-7, and if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s is not pressed, the process moves to step S450-9. .

(Step S450-7)
The main CPU 300a adds 1 to the setting value of the processing area.

(Step S450-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting value of the processing area is within the range of 1 to 6. As a result, if it is determined that the set value is within the range of 1 to 6, the process moves to step S450-13, and if it is determined that the set value is not within the range of 1 to 6, the process moves to step S450-11. move.

(Step S450-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting value of the processing area to 1.

(Step S450-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting value of the processing area in the setting value buffer.

(Step S450-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change switch 180s is on. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the setting-related process is ended, and if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is not turned on, the process moves to step S450-17.

(Step S450-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a settings-related end designation command indicating the end of the settings-related process in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a executes the subcommand group set process shown in FIG. That is, when the setting-related process is executed, at the end, the model command, setting value specification command, special figure 1 hold specification command, special figure 2 hold specification command, number of times command, variation pattern selection state specification command, special figure phase A designation command and a customer waiting designation command are transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S450-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 00H (playable state) and ends the setting-related processing.

As described above, according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, when the power is turned on normally with the middle frame 104 opened, the setting change switch 180s turned on, and the RAM clear button pressed, the CPU initializes. In the processing (FIG. 29), 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine state flag. After that, the timer interrupt process is executed, but since the gaming machine status flag is set to 01H (setting change status), all processes related to the progress of the game (steps S400-15 to S400-27 in FIG. 33) are executed. ) is stopped and configuration-related processing is executed.

The setting-related process is repeatedly executed while the setting change switch 180s is on, and during this setting-related process, a press operation of the RAM clear button is accepted as a setting change operation of the registered setting value. That is, during the setting change process (S450-1 to S450-13) that accepts a setting change operation, the registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer is set to one of the setting values in multiple stages according to the setting change operation. can be switched to

Then, when the setting change switch 180s is turned off while the gaming machine status flag is set to 01H (setting change state), the setting change process ends and the gaming machine status flag is set to 00H (playable status). Set. As a result, processing related to the progress of the game can be executed from the next timer interrupt processing.

Here, in the setting-related processing of the simultaneous rotation reference example, after the RAM clear button press operation, that is, the reception of the setting change operation of the registered setting value, is completed, the setting value corresponding to the registered setting value is specified in the subcommand group set processing. The command is sent to sub control board 330. On the other hand, while a setting change operation is being accepted, the setting value designation command is not sent to the sub control board 330. In this way, the setting value specification command is not sent while the setting change operation is being accepted, but the setting value specification command is sent when the setting change operation is finished accepting and the game can proceed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the risk that registered setting values are obtained illegally.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, a plurality of flag values including at least 01H (setting change state) are switched. When the gaming machine state flag is set to 01H (setting change state), the setting-related process becomes executable and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, since no settings-related processing is executed while the game is in progress, no setting value specification commands are sent while the game is in progress, reducing the risk of unauthorized acquisition of registered setting values. be done.

Next, among the timer interrupt processes described above, the switch management process in step S500, the special game management process in step S600, the special electric accessory game management process in step S700, and the normal game management process in step S800 will be explained in detail. .

FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating switch management processing (step S500) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous operation reference example.

(Step S500-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gate detection switch is being turned on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the detection signal from the gate detection switch 124s has been turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is detected, the process moves to step S510, and if it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is not detected, the process moves to step S500-7.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes a gate passage process based on passage of the game ball to the gate 124. Note that details of this gate passing process will be described later.

(Step S500-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal game operating port detection switch is on-detected, that is, whether a game ball enters the normal game operating port 125 and the detection signal from the normal game operating port detection switch 125s is turned on. . As a result, if it is determined that the ordinary figure actuation opening detection switch is turned on, the process moves to step S510, and if it is determined that the ordinary figure actuation opening detection switch is not turned on, the process goes to step S500-5. move.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes a gate passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the normal figure operating port 125.

(Step S500-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first fixed starting port detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the first fixed starting port 120A and a detection signal is input from the first fixed starting port detection switch 120As. judge. As a result, if it is determined that the first fixed starting port detection switch is on, the process moves to step S520, and if it is determined that the first fixed starting port detection switch is not on, the process moves to step S500-7. Processing is transferred to .

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first starting port passing process based on the game ball entering the first fixed starting port 120A. Note that details of this first starting port passing process will be described later.

(Step S500-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first variable starting port detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B and a detection signal is input from the first variable starting port detection switch 120Bs. judge. As a result, if it is determined that the first variable starting port detection switch is on, the process moves to step S520, and if it is determined that the first variable starting port detection switch is not on, the process moves to step S500-11. Processing is transferred to .

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first starting port passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. Note that details of this first starting port passing process will be described later.

(Step S500-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the game ball has entered the first variable starting port 120B properly, and if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first variable starting port 120B properly, the main CPU 300a determines whether the game ball has entered the first variable starting port 120B properly. A normal electric accessory winning confirmation process is executed to send a normal electric accessory winning error generation designation command to the sub-control board 330, which indicates that an illegal game ball has entered the variable starting port 120B.

(Step S500-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the second starting port detection switch is on-detection, that is, whether a game ball enters the second starting port 122 and a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 122s. As a result, if it is determined that the second starting port detection switch is on, the process moves to step S530, and if it is determined that the second starting port detection switch is not on, the process moves to step S500-13. move.

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300a executes the second starting port passing process based on the game ball entering the second starting port 122. Note that details of this second starting port passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the big winning opening detection switch is turned on, that is, when a game ball enters the first big winning opening 126 or the second big winning opening 128 and the first big winning opening detection switch 126s or the second big winning opening detection switch is turned on. It is determined whether a detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch 128s. As a result, if it is determined that the big winning opening detection switch is on, the process moves to step S540, and if it is determined that the big winning opening detection switch is not on, the switch management process is ended.

(Step S540)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the game ball has entered properly into the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128, and when it is determined that the game ball has entered properly. In this step, a grand prize opening passage process is executed to transmit a grand prize opening entry command indicating the entry of a game ball into the first grand prize opening 126 or the second grand prize opening 128 to the sub-control board 330. The details of this big prize opening passage process will be described later.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating the gate passing process (step S510) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S510-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S510-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is greater than or equal to the maximum value, that is, whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is 4 or more. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the gate passing process is terminated, and if it is determined that the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is not greater than the maximum value, The process moves to step S510-5.

(Step S510-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S510-7)
The main CPU 300a calculates a target storage section in which the acquired winning determination random number is to be saved among the four storage sections of the normal pattern reservation storage area.

(Step S510-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning determination random number obtained in the above step S510-1 in the target storage section calculated in the above step S510-7.

(Step S510-11)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a general pattern reservation designation command indicating the general pattern reservation number stored in the general pattern reservation storage area, and ends the gate passing process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating the first starting port passing process (step S520) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S520-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the special symbol identification value. In addition, the special symbol identification value is for identifying whether the reservation type is special 1 reservation or special 2 reservation, and the special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 reservation, and the special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 reservation. 01H) indicates special 2 reservation.

(Step S520-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol random number acquisition process, and ends the first starting opening passage process. Note that this special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a module common to the second starting opening passage process (step S530). Therefore, details of the special symbol random number acquisition process will be explained after explaining the second starting opening passage process.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating the second starting port passing process (step S530) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S530-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as the special symbol identification value.

(Step S530-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol random number acquisition process to be described later, and ends the second starting opening passage process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol random number acquisition process (step S535) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a common module in the first starting opening passage process (step S520) and the second starting opening passage process (step S530) described above.

(Step S535-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol identification value set in step S520-1 or step S530-1.

(Step S535-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the number of target special symbol reserved balls. Here, if the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "00H", the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter, that is, the special 1 reserved number is loaded. Further, if the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "01H", the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, that is, the special 2 reserved number is loaded.

(Step S535-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S535-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the target special symbol reserved ball number loaded in step S535-3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value. As a result, if it is determined that it is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the special symbol random number acquisition process is ended, and if it is determined that it is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the process moves to step S535-9.

(Step S535-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S535-11)
The main CPU 300a calculates a target storage section in which the acquired jackpot determination random number is to be saved among the storage sections of the special figure reservation storage area.

(Step S535-13)
The main CPU 300a acquires the jackpot determination random number loaded in step S535-5 above, the winning symbol random number updated in step S400-19 above, and the fluctuation pattern random number updated in step S100-69 above, and executes the random number in step S535-11 above. Store it in the target storage unit calculated in .

(Step S535-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the special figure reservation designation command in the transmission buffer based on the counter value loaded in step S535-15. Here, the special symbol 1 reservation designation command is set based on the counter value of the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter (special 1 reservation number), and the special symbol 1 reservation designation command is set based on the counter value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter (special 2 reservation number). and set the special map 2 reservation designation command. As a result, the number of special 1 reservations and the number of special 2 reservations are transmitted to the sub-control board 330 every time special 1 reservation or special 2 reservation is stored.

(Step S536)
The main CPU 300a performs the performance determination process at the time of acquisition, and ends the special symbol random number acquisition process. In this performance determination process at the time of acquisition, the result of the major lottery, the fluctuation pattern number, etc. are tentatively determined, and a prefetch designation command according to the result of the tentative determination is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. This performance determination process at the time of acquisition will be explained using FIG. 40.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the acquisition performance determination process (step S536) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S536-1)
The main CPU 300a selects a corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table based on the setting value being set. Specifically, the corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table is selected based on the current gaming state and the setting value being set. Then, based on the selected table and the jackpot determination random number stored in the target storage section in step S535-13, special symbol hit provisional determination processing is performed to provisionally determine whether it is a jackpot, a small win, or a loss.

(Step S536-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol temporary determination process for temporarily determining a special symbol. Here, if the result of the provisional major lottery in step S536-1 (the result derived by the special symbol hit provisional determination process) is a jackpot or small win, it is stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. Load the winning pattern random number, winning type (big hit or small win), and pending type, select the corresponding winning pattern random number judgment table, extract the special pattern judgment data, and extract the extracted special pattern judgment data. (Type of jackpot symbol or small prize symbol). Further, if the result of the tentative major lottery in step S536-1 is a loss, special symbol determination data for a predetermined loss (type of loss symbol) is saved.

(Step S536-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a prefetch symbol type designation command (prefetch designation command) corresponding to the special symbol determination data saved in step S536-3 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S536-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result derived by the temporary special symbol hit determination process in step S536-1 is a big hit or a small hit. As a result, if it is determined that it is a big hit or a small win, the process moves to step S536-9, and if it is determined that it is not a big hit or a small hit (a loss), the process moves to step S536-11.

(Step S536-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the random number determination table for determining the reach mode at the time of a jackpot (see FIGS. 17(b) and (c)) or the random number determination table for determining the reach mode at the time of a small win (see FIGS. 17(d) and (e)), and performs step The process moves to S536-19.

(Step S536-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the reach group determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13 above.

(Step S536-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 is a fixed value (9000 or more). Here, the group type is determined with reference to the reach group determination random number determination table, and this reach group determination random number determination table is selected according to the stored number of reservations. At this time, the reach group determination random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 10006, and if the value of the reach group determination random number is 9000 or more, the same reach group determination random number determination table is selected regardless of the number of reservations, and the reach group determination random number is If the value of the group determination random number is less than 9000, a different reach group determination random number determination table is selected depending on the number of reservations. In the following, among the reach group determination random numbers, a value in the range of 0 to 8999, in which different reach group determination random number determination tables are selected depending on the number of reservations, is defined as an undefined value, and the same reach group determination random number determination table is used regardless of the number of reservations. The values in the range 9000 to 10006 from which the table is selected are called fixed values. If it is determined that the reach group determination random number loaded in the above step S536-11 is a fixed value (9000 or more), the process moves to step S536-15, and the reach group determination random number loaded in the above step S536-11 is fixed. If it is determined that it is not a value (9000 or more), the process moves to step S536-27.

(Step S536-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a reach group determination random number determination table (see FIG. 16). Although a plurality of types of reach group determination random number determination tables are provided depending on the number of reservations, here, the table used when the number of reservations is 0 is selected. Then, a reach group (group type) is tentatively determined based on the set reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a reach mode determination random number determination table (see FIG. 17(a)) corresponding to the group type tentatively determined in step S536-15, and moves the process to step S536-19.

(Step S536-19)
The main CPU 300a determines the variable mode number based on the reach mode determination random number determination table set in step S536-9 or step S536-17, and the reach mode determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. tentatively decided. Also, here, a variation pattern random number determination table is provisionally determined together with the variation mode number.

(Step S536-21)
The main CPU 300a sets a prefetch designation variation mode command (prefetch designation command) corresponding to the variation mode number tentatively determined in step S536-19 above in the transmission buffer.

(Step S536-23)
The main CPU 300a tentatively determines a fluctuation pattern number based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table tentatively determined in step S536-19 and the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-25)
The main CPU 300a sets the prefetch designation variation pattern command (prefetch designation command) corresponding to the variation pattern number tentatively determined in step S536-23 in the transmission buffer, and ends the acquisition performance determination process.

(Step S536-27)
The main CPU 300a sends an indefinite value command (preread The designated fluctuation mode command and the pre-read designated fluctuation pattern command (=7FH) are set in the transmission buffer, and the acquisition performance determination process is ended.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating the big winning opening passage process (step S540) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S540-1)
If the main CPU 300a determines in step S500-13 that the big winning opening detection switch is on, it loads a special electric accessory game management phase which will be described in detail later. Although the details will be described later, the special electric accessory game management phase indicates the stage of execution processing of the big prize game or the small winning game, that is, the progress status of the big winning game or the small winning game. It is updated according to the stage of execution processing of the winning game.

(Step S540-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric accessory game management phase loaded in the above step S540-1 indicates a stage of execution processing equal to or higher than the grand prize opening pre-processing. In addition, the special electric accessory game management phase is provided with nine stages from 00H to 08H, of which 01H to 08H corresponds to the stage of execution processing beyond the grand prize opening pre-processing. Since the big winning game or the small winning game is executed when the special electric accessory game management phase is from 01H to 08H, here, it is determined whether the big winning game or the small winning game is currently being played. Become. If it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase indicates a stage of execution processing higher than the grand prize opening pre-processing, the process moves to step S540-5, and the special electric accessory game management phase If it is determined that this does not indicate a stage of execution processing beyond the grand prize opening pre-processing, the process moves to step S540-7.

(Step S540-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a grand prize opening entry ball command indicating that the game ball has properly entered the first grand prize opening 126 or the second grand prize opening 128 in the transmission buffer, and ends the grand prize opening passing process. .

(Step S540-7)
The main CPU 300a determines that the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128 is inappropriate, executes a predetermined error process, and ends the big winning hole passing process.

FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating the special game management phase according to the simultaneous play reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, there is a special game triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, and a special game triggered by the passing of a game ball into the gate 124 or the normal pattern operating port. A normal game triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball 125 proceeds simultaneously and in parallel. Processing related to the special game is executed stepwise and repeatedly, but the main control board 300 manages each processing related to the special game in a special game management phase and a special electric accessory game management phase. .

As shown in FIG. 42, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of special game control modules for executing and controlling the variable display of special symbols in the special game, and each of these special game control modules A management phase is associated with it. Specifically, when the special game management phase is "00H", a module for executing the "special symbol change waiting process" is called, and when the special game management phase is "01H", A module for executing "special symbol fluctuation processing" is called, and when the special game management phase is "02H", a module for executing "special symbol stop symbol display processing" is called.

In addition, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of special electric accessory game control modules for controlling the execution of big prize games and small winning games among the special games, and for each of these special electric accessory game control modules, The special electric accessory game management phase is associated with it. Specifically, when the special electric accessory game management phase is “01H” or “05H”, a module for executing “big prize opening opening pre-processing” is called, and the special electric accessory game management phase is called. When the phase is "02H" or "06H", a module for executing "big prize opening control process" is called, and the special electric accessory game management phase is "03H" or "07H". In this case, the module for executing the “big winning opening closing effective process” is called, and if the special electric accessory game management phase is “04H” or “08H”, the “big winning opening ending wait processing” is called. ” is called. Note that when the special electric accessory game management phase is "00H", no special electric accessory game control module is called.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating the special game management process (step S600) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous play reference example.

(Step S600-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special electric accessory game management phase.

(Step S600-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric accessory game management phase loaded in step S600-1 is other than "00H". That is, here, it is determined whether the player is currently playing a large winning game or a small winning game. If it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is other than "00H", the special game management process is ended, and if it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is not other than "00H", step S600 -5.

(Step S600-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game special symbol determination flag. In addition, the special game special symbol determination flag is for determining whether the reservation type targeted for special game management processing is special 1 reservation or special 2 reservation, and the special game special symbol determination flag (00H ) indicates special 1 reservation, and the special game special symbol determination flag (01H) indicates special 2 reservation.

(Step S600-7)
The main CPU 300a inverts the special game special symbol determination flag loaded in step S600-5. Here, when the special game special symbol determination flag is "00H", it is inverted to "01H", and when the special game special symbol determination flag is "01H", it is inverted to "00H". Since the initial value of the special game special symbol determination flag is set to "00H", the special game special symbol determination is performed in the first special game management process S600 of the two special game management processes S600 shown in FIG. The flag is set to "01H", the subsequent processing is executed for special 2 pending, the special game special symbol determination flag is set to "00H" in the second special game management process S600, and the subsequent processing is executed for special 1 pending. be done. In other words, special 2 reservations are processed with priority.

(Step S600-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the special game special symbol determination flag that was inverted in step S600-7.

(Step S600-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game management phase.

(Step S600-13)
The main CPU 300a selects the special game control module corresponding to the special game management phase loaded in step S600-11 above.

(Step S600-15)
The main CPU 300a calls the special game control module selected in step S600-13 above to start processing.

(Step S600-17)
The main CPU 300a loads a special game timer that manages the control time of the special game, and ends the special game management process.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol change waiting process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special symbol change waiting process is executed when the special game management phase is "00H".

(Step S610-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the number of special symbol reserved balls targeted for special game management processing (Special 1 pending or Special 2 pending, hereinafter referred to as target pending) is 1 or more. As a result, if it is determined that the number of special symbol reserved balls is 1 or more, the process moves to step S610-3, and if it is determined that the number of special symbol reserved balls is not 1 or more, the special symbol change waiting process is performed. end.

(Step S610-3)
The main CPU 300a is determining a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a non-target special symbol) based on a reservation that is not subject to special game management processing (Special 2 reservation or Special 1 reservation, hereinafter referred to as non-target reservation). Determine if there is. As a result, if it is determined that the non-target special symbol is being determined, the process moves to step S610-5, and if it is determined that the special symbol based on the non-target special symbol is not being determined, step S610-9 Processing is transferred to .

(Step S610-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the non-target special symbol is a jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that it is a jackpot symbol, the special symbol change waiting process is ended, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S610-7.

(Step S610-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the non-target special symbol is a small winning symbol. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol is a small winning symbol, the special symbol fluctuation waiting process is ended, and if it is determined that it is not a small winning symbol, the process is moved to step S610-9.

(Step S610-9)
The main CPU 300a block-transfers the target reservations stored in the first to fourth storage units of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding to the target reservations to the storage unit with one ordinal number smaller. Specifically, the pending objects stored in the second to fourth storage units are transferred to the first to third storage units. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the target pending stored in the first storage unit is block transferred to the 0th storage unit. In addition, in this special symbol storage area shift processing, the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball number counter corresponding to the target reserved is subtracted by "1", and the pending reduction value indicating that the target reserved has been subtracted by "1" is Sets the specified command in the send buffer.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol winning determination process for performing a major lottery. This special symbol hit determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-11)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol. Here, if the result of the major lottery in step S611 is a jackpot or a small win, the winning symbol random number and reservation type transferred to the 0th storage section are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table or small winning symbol is loaded. Select the random number determination table, extract special symbol determination data, and save the extracted special symbol determination data (type of jackpot symbol). Moreover, when the result of the big winning lottery in step S611 is a loss, special symbol determination data for a loss is saved. Then, after saving the special symbol determination data, a symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in step S610-11. Note that the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are each composed of 7 segments, and a number (counter value) is associated with each segment that constitutes the 7 segments. The special symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates the number (counter value) of the segment that will finally light up.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation number determination process that determines a variation mode number and a variation pattern number. Details of this special symbol variation number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the variation mode number and variation pattern number determined in step S612 above, and determines variation time 1 and variation time 2 by referring to the variation time determination table. Then, the total time of the determined fluctuation times 1 and 2 is set in the special symbol fluctuation timer.

(Step S610-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the big winning lottery is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the main CPU 300a loads the special symbol determination data saved in step S610-11 above and checks the type of jackpot symbol. do. Then, with reference to the gaming state setting table and the current gaming state, the gaming state, high accuracy number, and time saving number to be set after the end of the big prize game are determined, and the determination results are used as the special symbol probability state preliminary flag and the time saving state preliminary flag. It is saved in the flag, high-accuracy number-cutting reserve counter, and time-saving number-cutting reserve counter. In addition, if the losing symbol is saved, the process moves to the next process without executing the process.

(Step S610-19)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display symbol counter in the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 in order to start variable display of special symbols. A counter value is associated with each of the 7 segments that constitute the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162, and the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is Lighting is controlled. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be lit at the start of the variable display of the special symbol will be set in the special symbol display symbol counter. The special symbol display symbol counter includes a special symbol 1 display symbol counter corresponding to the first special symbol display 160 and a special symbol 2 display symbol counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 162, which are separately provided. Here, a counter value is set in a counter corresponding to the reservation type.

(Step S613)
The main CPU 300a executes the number-of-times management process. Here, processing is performed to end the time saving gaming state according to the number of fluctuations. This number-of-times management process will be described later.

(Step S610-21)
The main CPU 300a sets a number command indicating the remaining number of times (actual remaining number of times) until the high-accuracy number of times and the time-saving number of times become 0 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-23)
The main CPU 300a sets a gaming state change designation command indicating the gaming state at the start of the variable display of special symbols in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H" and ends the special symbol change waiting process.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol hit determination process (S611) according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S611-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol probability state flag.

(Step S611-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered setting values in the setting value buffer.

(Step S611-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the registered setting value loaded in step S611-3 is within the normal range. As a result, if it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the process moves to step S611-11, and if it is determined that the value is not within the normal range, the process moves to step S611-7.

(Step S611-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 03H (setting abnormal state).

(Step S611-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting abnormal state command (subcommand) in the transmission buffer, and ends the special symbol hit determination process. When this setting abnormal state command is sent to the sub control board 330, a notification to the effect that the setting is abnormal is made.

(Step S611-11)
The main CPU 300a refers to the jackpot determination random number determination table corresponding to the information loaded in steps S611-1 and S611-3, and sets the lower limit value and upper limit value for determining a jackpot or small win, respectively.

(Step S611-13)
The main CPU 300a compares the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit with the above lower limit value and upper limit value, and performs a determination process (major lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot or small win has been won.

(Step S611-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the non-target special symbol is a jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that it is a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S611-17, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S611-21.

(Step S611-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the large winning lottery result in step S611-13 is a small win or a loss. As a result, if it is determined that there is a small hit or a loss, the process moves to step S611-21, and if it is determined that there is no small hit or loss, the process moves to step S611-19.

(Step S611-19)
The main CPU 300a changes the winning lottery result in step S611-13 to a loss.

(Step S611-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the result of the determination process in step S611-13 or the result changed in step S611-19 as determination information, and ends the special symbol hit determination process.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol variation number determination process (step S612) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the major lottery in step S611 is a big win or a small win. As a result, if it is determined that it is a jackpot or a small win, the process moves to step S612-3, and if it is determined that it is neither a jackpot nor a small hit (a loss), the process moves to step S612-5. Move.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a sets a reach mode determination random number determination table corresponding to the current gaming state and reservation type.

(Step S612-5)
The main CPU 300a checks the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter when the read reservation type is special 2 reservation, and when the read reservation reservation type is special 1 reservation, Check the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a sets a corresponding reach group determination random number determination table based on the current gaming state, the number of reservations confirmed in step S612-5, and the reservation type. Then, a reach group (group type) is determined based on the set reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a sets a reach mode determination random number determination table in case of loss corresponding to the group type determined in step S612-7.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a selects the variable mode based on the reach mode determination random number determination table set in step S612-3 or step S612-9 and the reach mode determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9. Decide on the number. In addition, here, together with the variation mode number, a variation pattern random number determination table is determined.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the variable mode command corresponding to the variable mode number determined in step S612-11 above in the transmission buffer.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a determines a fluctuation pattern number based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table determined in step S612-11 above and the fluctuation pattern random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9 described above.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S612-15 above in the transmission buffer, and ends the special symbol variation number determination process.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating the number cut management process (step S613) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the number of time reductions, that is, the counter value of the time reduction number cut-off counter is greater than zero. As a result, if it is determined that the number of time reductions is greater than 0, the process moves to step S613-3, and if it is determined that the number of time reductions is 0, the number of time reduction management processing is ended.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a decrements the time saving counter.

(Step S613-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value (time saving number) has been updated to 0 in step S613-3. As a result, if it is determined that the number of time reductions is 0, the process moves to step S613-7, and if it is determined that the number of time reductions is not 0, the number of time reduction management processing is ended.

(Step S613-7)
The main CPU 300a sets a time-saving state flag in order to set the normal gaming state to a non-time-saving gaming state. As a result, after the normal gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state is changed to the non-time-saving gaming state at the start of fluctuation when the number of fluctuations reaches the number of time-savings (in this case, 50 or 100 times). The Rukoto. For example, if the state is set to a high probability precursor state, it will be set to the most dominant state.

(Step S613-9)
The main CPU 300a turns on the time saving end flag and ends the number-of-times-cutting management process.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating special symbol fluctuation processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S620-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the suspended flag is on. Although details will be described later, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, small winning symbols may be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner on the first special symbol display 160. In this case, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, a small winning game is executed, but during this time, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 160 is interrupted. After the end of the small winning game, the variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display 160 is restarted. The suspended flag is turned on when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 and the first special symbol display 160 is in the process of displaying the symbols in a fluctuating manner. Here, when it is determined that the suspended flag is on, the special symbol variation process is ended, and when it is determined that the suspended flag is not on, the process moves to step S620-3.

(Step S620-3)
The main CPU 300a executes processing to update the special symbol variation base counter. Note that the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is set so that it makes one round at a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms). Specifically, when the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is "0", a predetermined counter value (for example, 25) is set, and when the counter value is "1" or more, The counter value is updated to the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value.

(Step S620-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter updated in step S620-3 is "0". As a result, if the counter value is "0", the process moves to step S620-7, and if the counter value is not "0", the process moves to step S620-11.

(Step S620-7)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol fluctuation timer update process that subtracts a predetermined value from the timer value of the special symbol fluctuation timer set in step S610-15.

(Step S620-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol fluctuation timer updated in step S620-7 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process moves to step S620-17, and if the timer value is not "0", the process moves to step S620-11.

(Step S620-11)
The main CPU 300a updates a special symbol display timer that measures the lighting time of each segment of the 7 segments that constitute the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162. Specifically, when the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, the timer value is set from the current timer value. Update the timer value to the value subtracted by "1".

(Step S620-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", the process moves to step S620-15, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is not "0", the relevant Finish the special symbol changing process.

(Step S620-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special symbol display symbol counter to be updated, and ends the special symbol fluctuation processing. As a result, each segment constituting the 7 segments is sequentially lit at predetermined time intervals.

(Step S620-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the non-target special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, if it is determined that the non-target special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S621, and if it is determined that the non-target special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process is transferred to step S620-19.

(Step S621)
The main CPU 300a executes a pattern forced stop process. This symbol forced stop processing will be described later using FIG. 49.

(Step S620-19)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "02H".

(Step S620-21)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in the above step S610-13 in the target special symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

(Step S620-23)
The main CPU 300a sets a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S620-25)
The main CPU 300a sets the special symbol fluctuation stop time, which is the time during which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, in the special game timer, and ends the special symbol fluctuation processing.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating the pattern forced stop processing (step S621) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S621-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol. As a result, if it is determined that it is a small winning symbol, the process moves to step S621-3, and if it is determined that it is not a small winning symbol, the process moves to step S621-11.

(Step S621-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game special symbol determination flag is 00H, that is, whether the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160. As a result, if it is determined that the special game special symbol determination flag is 00H, the process moves to step S621-11, and if it is determined that the special game special symbol determination flag is not 00H, the process advances to step S621-5. move.

(Step S621-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the (other) special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is a jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that it is a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S621-11, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S621-7.

(Step S621-7)
The main CPU 300a turns on the suspending flag.

(Step S621-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a variation interruption process to interrupt the variation display of the special symbols, and ends the symbol forced stop process. Here, processing is performed to temporarily save information regarding the remaining time of the variable time and special symbols to a predetermined storage area.

(Step S621-11)
The main CPU 300a causes the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 on which symbols are displayed to be changed to forcibly stop losing symbols, and also to forcibly terminate the remaining variation time. A process of turning on the stop flag is performed, and the pattern forced stop process is ended.

As a result of the above processing, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the losing symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162. In addition, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, if the jackpot symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner in which it is finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the first special symbol is displayed. A losing symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed on the device 160. On the other hand, when a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, if a small winning symbol or a losing symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner in which it is finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, 1 The variable display on the special symbol display 160 will be temporarily interrupted.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating special symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S620-25 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the special symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", The process moves to step S630-3.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the variable time special stop flag is on. As a result, if it is determined that the variable time special stop flag is on, the process moves to step S630-5, and if it is determined that the variable time special stop flag is not on, the special symbol stop symbol display process is ended. do.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a confirms the results of the major lottery.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the major lottery is a loss. As a result, if it is determined that the game is a loss, the process moves to step S630-27, and if it is determined that the game is not a loss, the process moves to step S630-9.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a game state update process to update the game state. Here, when the special symbol being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol, the game state is set to the initial state, and when the special symbol being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol, the process proceeds directly to the next process.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a sets data in the special electric accessory actuation ram set table according to the determined type of special symbol. Note that the main CPU 300a turns off the variable time special stop flag when it is on.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a special electric accessory maximum activation count setting process. Specifically, with reference to the data set in step S630-11 above, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation number counter. . In addition, this special electric accessory maximum operation number counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big prize game that will start from now. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, and at the start of each round game, by adding "1" to the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, the current The number of round games is managed. Here, with the start of the big winning game, a process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter is also executed.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-11 above and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special electric accessory game timer.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the big prize game to the sub control board 330 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to "01H" when starting a big prize game, and updates the special electric accessory game management phase to "05H" when starting a small winning game. .

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H".

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric accessory game management phase updated in step S630-19 is "01H", that is, whether it is a jackpot. As a result, if it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is "01H", the process moves to step S630-25, and if it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is not "01H", the process is moved to step S630-25. , the process moves to step S630-27.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output start process for outputting a jackpot signal from the game information output terminal board 312, and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. Through this process, a jackpot signal will be output with the start of the big winning game (opening). Although a plurality of signals are provided to be output from the game information output terminal board 312, only a predetermined jackpot signal will be explained here.

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a sets a game state confirmation designation command when a special symbol is confirmed, which indicates the gaming state when the special symbol is confirmed, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the time saving end flag is on. As described above, the time-saving end flag is turned on in step S613-9 of FIG. 47 at the start of fluctuation when changing from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state. In other words, if the time saving end flag is on here, at the start of the 50th or 100th change in the high probability precursor state, the normal gaming state changes from the time saving gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state due to the time saving exit. This is the case. In other words, here, it is determined that the time saving end flag is on only when the fluctuation at the time of time saving exit ends. If it is determined that the time saving end flag is on, the process moves to step S630-31, and if it is determined that the time saving end flag is not on, the process moves to step S630-35.

(Step S630-31)
The main CPU 300a performs jackpot signal output stop processing to stop the jackpot signal being output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, the jackpot signal will be output during the big prize game or during the time saving game state.

(Step S630-33)
The main CPU 300a turns off the time saving end flag.

(Step S630-35)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating the special electric accessory game management process (step S700) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous play reference example.

(Step S700-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special electric accessory game management phase.

(Step S700-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric accessory game management phase loaded in step S700-1 is "00H". That is, here, it is determined whether a large winning game or a small winning game is currently being played. If it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is "00H", the special electric accessory game management process is ended, and if it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is not "00H", step The process moves to S700-5.

(Step S700-5)
The main CPU 300a selects the special electric accessory game control module corresponding to the special electric accessory game management phase loaded in step S700-1 above.

(Step S700-7)
The main CPU 300a calls the special electric accessory game control module selected in step S700-5 above to start processing.

(Step S700-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the special electric accessory game timer that manages the control time of the special electric accessory game, and ends the special electric accessory game management process.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This big prize opening pre-opening process is executed when the special electric accessory game management phase is "01H" or "05H".

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer set in step S630-15 and the like is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is not "0", the corresponding big prize opening pre-opening process is finished, and the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is "0". If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a big winning opening designation command for transmitting the opening start of the big winning opening (start of the round game) to the sub control board 330.

(Step S711)
The main CPU 300a executes the big winning opening opening/closing switching process. This big winning hole opening/closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("02H" or "06H"), and ends the big prize opening pre-opening process.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating the big winning opening opening/closing switching process (S711) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S711-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching number counter is the upper limit of the number of special electric accessory opening/closing switching (the number of opening/closing of the big prize opening during one round game). As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the corresponding big winning opening opening/closing switching process is ended, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is moved to step S711-3.

(Step S711-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data of the special electric accessory activation ram set table and energizes the first grand prize opening solenoid 126c and the second grand prize opening solenoid 128c based on the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching counter. Solenoid control data for control and time data indicating energization time or energization stop time are extracted.

(Step S711-5)
The main CPU 300a starts energizing the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c based on the solenoid control data extracted in the above step S711-3, or controls the main CPU 300a to start energizing the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c, or to stop the energization. Execute the prize opening solenoid energization control process. By executing this big winning hole solenoid energization control process, in step S400-33 and step S400-35, the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c is controlled to start or stop energizing. That will happen.

(Step S711-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the time data extracted in step S711-3 above in the special electric accessory game timer. In addition, the timer value saved in the special electric accessory game timer here becomes the maximum opening time of one time of the big prize opening.

(Step S711-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c is in the energization start state, that is, in the above step S711-5, the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c is activated. It is determined whether control processing to start energization has been performed. As a result, if it is determined that the current is in the energization start state, the process moves to step S711-11, and if it is determined that the energization is not in the energization start state, the big winning opening opening/closing switching process is ended.

(Step S711-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the big winning opening opening/closing switching process.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating the big winning opening control process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This big prize opening control process is executed when the special electric accessory game management phase is "02H" or "06H".

(Step S720-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer saved in step S711-7 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is not "0", the process moves to step S720-5, and it is determined that the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is "0". If so, the process moves to step S720-3.

(Step S720-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process moves to step S720-7, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process moves to step S711.

(Step S711)
In step S720-3 above, if it is determined that the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is not the upper limit value of the number of switching times of special electric accessory opening/closing, the main CPU 300a executes the process of step S711 above. do.

(Step S720-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the grand prize opening winning ball number counter updated in step S500-9 has reached the specified number, that is, the number of balls that can be won in the grand prize opening is the same as the maximum possible number of prizes in one round. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the ball. As a result, if it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the big winning opening control process is ended, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process moves to step S720-7.

(Step S720-7)
The main CPU 300a executes a special winning hole closing process necessary to close the special winning hole by stopping the energization of the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c. As a result, the grand prize opening will be closed.

(Step S720-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the big winning opening closing effective time (interval time) in the special electric accessory game timer.

(Step S720-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("03H" or "07H").

(Step S720-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a big winning opening closing designation command indicating that the big winning opening is closed in the transmission buffer, and ends the big winning opening opening control process.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating the big winning opening closing effective process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This big prize opening closing validating process is executed when the special electric accessory game management phase is "03H" or "07H".

(Step S730-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer saved in step S720-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is not "0", the corresponding big prize opening closing valid processing is terminated, and if the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is "0". If determined, the process moves to step S730-3.

(Step S730-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum operation number counter, that is, whether the preset number of round games has been completed. . As a result, if it is determined that the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous activation number counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum activation number counter, the process moves to step S730-9, and if it is determined that they do not match, the process moves to step S730-9. Then, the process moves to step S730-5.

(Step S730-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to "01H". Note that when the special electric accessory game management phase is 07H, that is, while the small winning game is being controlled, the number of rounds of the small winning game is "1", so be sure to answer YES in step S730-3 above. is determined, and the process does not proceed to that step.

(Step S730-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the predetermined grand prize opening closing time in the special game timer, and ends the big winning opening closing valid processing. As a result, the next round game will start.

(Step S730-9)
The main CPU 300a executes an ending time setting process to save the ending time in the special electric accessory game timer.

(Step S730-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("04H" or "08H").

(Step S730-13)
The main CPU 300a sets an ending designation command indicating the start of the ending in the transmission buffer, and ends the big winning opening closing validating process.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating the big winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This big winning opening end wait process is executed when the special electric accessory game management phase is "04H" or "08H".

(Step S740-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer saved in step S730-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is not "0", the corresponding big winning opening end wait process is terminated, and the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is "0". If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to step S740-3.

(Step S740-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric accessory game management phase is "08H", that is, whether the small winning game has ended. As a result, if it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is "08H", the process is moved to step S740-11, and if it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is not "08H", the process is moved to step S740-11. The process moves to step S740-5.

(Step S740-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a state setting process for setting the gaming state after the end of the big prize game. Here, the gaming state, high accuracy number, and time saving number set in the preliminary area in step S610-17 are loaded, and each flag is set and a counter value is set as the gaming state after the big prize game.

(Step S740-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal gaming state is set to the non-time-saving gaming state in step S740-5. As a result, if it is determined that the non-time-saving gaming state is set, the process moves to step S740-9, and if it is determined that the non-time-saving gaming state is not set, the process moves to step S740-21.

(Step S740-9)
The main CPU 300a performs jackpot signal output stop processing to stop the jackpot signal being output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, when the most advantageous state is set after the big prize game, the output of the jackpot signal is stopped at the end of the big prize game.

(Step S740-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the current gaming state is a high probability precursor state (high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state). As a result, if it is determined that the state is a highly reliable precursor state, the process moves to step S740-13, and if it is determined that the state is not a highly reliable precursor state, the process moves to step S740-21.

(Step S740-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed is the special symbol Z1. As a result, if it is determined that it is the special symbol Z1, the process moves to step S740-15, and if it is determined that it is not the special symbol Z1, the process moves to step S740-21.

(Step S740-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a time-saving state flag in order to change the normal gaming state to a non-time-saving gaming state. As a result, when the special symbol Z1 is determined in a high probability precursor state, the gaming state will be changed to the most advantageous state at the end of the small winning game.

(Step S740-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a counter reset process to reset the time saving number counter.

(Step S740-19)
The main CPU 300a performs jackpot signal output stop processing to stop the jackpot signal being output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, when the special symbol Z1 is won and the small winning game is set to the most dominant state after the small winning game, the output of the jackpot signal is stopped at the end of the small winning game.

(Step S740-21)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a gaming state change designation command for transmitting the gaming state set after the end of the big prize game.

(Step S740-23)
The main CPU 300a sets number commands corresponding to the high accuracy number and time saving number in the transmission buffer.

(Step S740-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to "00H" and ends the big winning opening end wait process. As a result, if special 1 hold or special 2 hold is stored, the fluctuating display of symbols will be restarted.

FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating the normal game management phase according to the simultaneous play reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous play reference example, the processing related to the normal game triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 124 or the entry of the game ball into the normal pattern operation opening 125 is performed stepwise and repeatedly. However, in the main control board 300, each process related to the normal game is managed by the normal game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 57, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of normal game control modules for controlling the execution of normal games, and a normal game management phase is associated with each of these normal game control modules. . Specifically, when the normal game management phase is "00H", the module for executing the "normal symbol change waiting process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "01H", A module for executing "normal symbol fluctuation processing" is called, and if the normal game management phase is "02H", a module for executing "normal symbol stop symbol display processing" is called, When the game management phase is "03H", the module for executing the "normal electric accessory prize opening pre-opening process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "04H", the "normal When the module for executing the "Electric accessory prize opening control process" is called, and the normal game management phase is "05H", the module for executing the "Ordinary electric accessory prize opening opening control process" is called. is called, and when the normal game management phase is "06H", a module for executing the "normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process" is called.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating the normal game management process (step S800) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous play reference example.

(Step S800-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S800-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the normal game control module corresponding to the normal game management phase loaded in step S800-1 above.

(Step S800-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the normal game control module selected in step S800-3 above to start processing.

(Step S800-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a normal game timer that manages control time for normal games.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating the normal symbol change waiting process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol change waiting process is executed when the normal game management phase is "00H".

(Step S810-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol pending ball counter and determines whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal symbol pending is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol change waiting process is ended, and if it is determined that the counter value is not "0", the process is moved to step S810-3.

(Step S810-3)
The main CPU 300a block-transfers the normal pattern reservations (winning determination random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the general pattern reservation storage area to the storage section with one ordinal number smaller. Specifically, the ordinary map reservations stored in the second to fourth storage units are transferred to the first to third storage units. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage section to be processed, and transfers the general map reservation stored in the first storage section to the 0th storage section. In addition, in this normal symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is subtracted by "1", and a regular symbol pending reduction designation command indicating that the regular symbol pending has been subtracted by "1" is transmitted. Set in buffer.

(Step S810-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects the winning determination random number determination table corresponding to the current gaming state, performs a regular symbol lottery, and stores the lottery result. Execute judgment processing.

(Step S810-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the regular symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the regular symbol lottery in step S810-5. In addition, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp, and in the case of a win, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and in the case of a loss, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off. let The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not the normal symbol display 168 will finally be lit. For example, in the case of winning, the normal symbol stop symbol number will be "0". is determined, and in the case of a loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S810-9)
The main CPU 300a confirms the current gaming state, selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol fluctuation time data table.

(Step S810-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol fluctuation time based on the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th storage section in step S810-3 and the normal symbol fluctuation time data table set in step S810-9.

(Step S810-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in step S810-11 above in the normal game timer.

(Step S810-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal symbol display symbol counter in order to start variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display 168. For example, if the counter value of this normal symbol display symbol counter is set to "0", the normal symbol display 168 is controlled to light up, and if the counter value is set to "1", the normal symbol display is displayed. The lamp 168 is controlled to be turned off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set to the normal symbol display symbol counter at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols.

(Step S810-17)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a general pattern reservation designation command indicating the general pattern reservation number stored in the general pattern reservation storage area.

(Step S810-19)
The main CPU 300a sends a normal symbol designation command to the sending buffer based on the normal symbol stop symbol number determined in step S810-7, that is, the symbol type (winning symbol or losing symbol) determined by the normal symbol hit determination process. Set to .

(Step S810-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and ends the normal symbol change waiting process.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol variation process is executed when the normal game management phase is "01H".

(Step S820-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S810-13 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process moves to step S820-9, and if the timer value is not "0", the process moves to step S820-3.

(Step S820-3)
The main CPU 300a updates a normal symbol display timer that measures the lighting time and light-off time of the normal symbol display 168. Specifically, when the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, the timer value is set from the current timer value. Update the timer value to the value subtracted by "1".

(Step S820-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", the process moves to step S820-7, and if it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is not "0", the corresponding Normal symbol fluctuation processing ends.

(Step S820-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. Here, if the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter is a counter value that indicates that the light of the normal symbol display 168 is off, it is updated to a counter value that indicates that the light of the symbol display 168 is lit, and the counter value that indicates that the symbol display 168 is lit is updated. If it is, the counter value is updated to indicate extinguishment, and the normal symbol fluctuation processing is terminated. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 repeats lighting and extinguishing (flashing) at predetermined time intervals over the normal symbol variation time.

(Step S820-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in the above step S810-7 in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 is finally controlled to turn on or off, and the result of the common symbol lottery is notified.

(Step S820-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal symbol fluctuation stop time, which is the time during which the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, in the normal game timer.

(Step S820-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal pattern stop designation command in the transmission buffer indicating that the stop display of the normal pattern has started.

(Step S820-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "02H" and ends the normal symbol variation process.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating the normal symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the normal game management phase is "02H".

(Step S830-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S820-11 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", The process moves to step S830-3.

(Step S830-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the general lottery.

(Step S830-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the general drawing lottery is a win. As a result, if it is determined that the game is a win, the process moves to step S830-9, and if it is determined that it is not a win (a loss), the process moves to step S830-7.

(Step S830-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the normal game management process based on the first normal symbol pending is completed, and if the common symbol pending is stored, the process for starting the fluctuating display of the normal symbol based on the next pending is performed. becomes.

(Step S830-9)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table and saves the time before normal power opening as a timer value in the normal game timer.

(Step S830-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "03H" and ends the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the opening/closing control of the first variable starting port 120B is started.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating the normal electric accessory prize opening pre-opening process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory prize opening pre-opening process is executed when the normal game management phase is "03H".

(Step S840-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S830-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory prize opening pre-opening process is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". If so, the process moves to step S841.

(Step S841)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process. This normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S840-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "04H" and ends the normal electric accessory prize opening pre-opening process.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating the normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S841-1)
The main CPU 300a determines that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency (the number of opening/closing times of the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B during one opening/closing control). Determine if there is. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S841-3. Move.

(Step S841-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table and generates solenoid control data (energization control data or energization (stop control data), and time data that is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or energization stop time (normal energization closing effective time = rest time) of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c.

(Step S841-5)
The main CPU 300a starts energizing the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c or starts energizing the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S841-3, or starts energizing the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c. Executes physical solenoid energization control processing. By executing this normal electric accessory solenoid energization control process, the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c is controlled to start or stop energizing in step S400-33 and step S400-35.

(Step S841-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the time data extracted in step S841-3 above in the normal game timer. Note that the timer value saved in the normal game timer here becomes the maximum opening time of the first variable starting port 120B once.

(Step S841-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c has started energization, that is, whether the control process to start energizing the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c has been performed in step S841-5. As a result, if it is determined that the current is in the energization start state, the process moves to step S841-11, and if it is determined that the energization is not in the energization start state, the normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process is ended.

(Step S841-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating the normal electric accessory prize opening control process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory prize opening control process is executed when the normal game management phase is "04H".

(Step S850-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S841-7 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the process moves to step S850-5, and if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", step S850 -3.

(Step S850-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit of the number of switching times of the normal electric accessory opening/closing. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process moves to step S850-7, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process moves to step S841.

(Step S841)
In step S850-3 above, if it is determined that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is not the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency, the main CPU 300a executes the process of step S841 above. do.

(Step S850-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory winning ball number counter updated in step S530-9 has reached the specified number, that is, whether the first variable starting port 120B is under one opening/closing control. It is determined whether the same number of game balls as the maximum possible winning number of balls have entered. As a result, if it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the normal electric accessory prize opening control process is ended, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process moves to step S850-7.

(Step S850-7)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric accessory closing process necessary to stop the energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c and close the first variable starting port 120B. As a result, the first variable starting port 120B is brought into a closed state.

(Step S850-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal power valid state time in the normal game timer.

(Step S850-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "05H" and ends the normal electric accessory prize opening control process.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating the normal electric accessory prize opening closing effective processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory prize opening effective processing is executed when the normal game management phase is "05H".

(Step S860-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S850-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory prize opening closing valid processing is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". If so, the process moves to step S860-3.

(Step S860-3)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal power end wait time in the normal game timer.

(Step S860-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "06H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening closing validating process.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory winning hole end wait process is executed when the normal game management phase is "06H".

(Step S870-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S860-3 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory prize opening end wait process is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". If so, the process moves to step S870-3.

(Step S870-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process. As a result, if the normal pattern is stored, the variable display of the normal pattern will be restarted. Next, as reference examples of performances, specific performances that can be executed in the above-mentioned type 1 gaming machines, type 2 gaming machines, and simultaneous spinning machines and specific processes related to the performances will be explained.

<Example of production reference>
FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation performance of a non-reach variation pattern according to a production reference example. As described above, when the major prize lottery is performed on the main control board 300, a variable performance for notifying the results of the major prize lottery is executed during the variable display of the special symbols, that is, over the period of time when the special symbols are varied. In this variable performance, various background images are displayed on the main performance display section 200a, and performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed superimposed on this background image. Note that during the variable performance, along with the image displayed on the main performance display section 200a, sound is output from the audio output device 206, the performance lighting device 204 is controlled to be lit, and the performance accessory device 202 is turned on. Although the movement is controlled, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The variable performance according to the reference example of performance is broadly classified into a no-reach variation pattern and a reach variation pattern. In the fluctuating performance of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main performance display section 200a, and performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are superimposed and variably displayed on this background image. For example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), it is assumed that performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a stopped state in a combination indicating that the winning lottery result is a loss. In this state, when a new special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, three production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 67(b). (scroll display). Note that the white arrow pointing downward in the figure indicates that the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are scrolled in the height direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(c), first, the performance symbol 210a is stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 67(d), a performance symbol 210c different from the performance symbol 210a is stopped and displayed. Then, at approximately the same timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the special symbol stops being displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, as shown in FIG. 67(e), , the performance symbols 210b are stopped and displayed, and the player is notified of the big prize lottery result based on the final stop display mode of the three performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c at this time.

FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation production of a normal reach variation pattern according to a production reference example. In the performance reference example, reach variation patterns are broadly classified into normal reach variation patterns, developed reach variation patterns, and pseudo-continuous reach variation patterns. In the variation presentation of the normal reach variation pattern, similarly to the variation production of the non-reach variation pattern, the variation display of the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c starts with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and as shown in FIG. 68(a). As shown, the production pattern 210a is first stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the same effect pattern 210c as the effect pattern 210a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, when the same performance symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the ready-to-reach mode in which they are stopped and displayed in the main performance display section 200a, as shown in FIG. 68(c), the performance symbols 210a and 210c are "Reach" is displayed superimposed on 210a and 210c. It should be noted that there are a plurality of types of ready-to-reach modes, and the same performance symbols 210a and 210c with numbers "1" to "9" written on them are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(d), the variable display is continued with the shapes of the production symbols 210a and 210c being different from before the ready-to-reach mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 68(e), finally, a performance pattern 210b different from the performance patterns 210a and 210c is stopped and displayed, and the player is informed that the result of the big winning lottery was a loss.

FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a fluctuating performance of the developed reach variation pattern at the time of a loss according to the production reference example, and FIG. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 69(a) to (d) and 70(a) to (d), the variation effect of the developed reach variation pattern is similar to the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern, in the main effect display section 200a, The effect patterns 210a and 210c are displayed in a ready-to-reach manner, and then a ready-to-reach development effect is executed in which a predetermined developed image (video) is played back and displayed. In this reach development effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 69(e) and 70(e), a mission is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and also as shown in FIGS. 69(f), (g) and 70( As shown in f) and (g), images for accomplishing the mission are displayed.

Here, the developed image for the reach development effect is roughly divided into a losing pattern and a jackpot pattern, and in the developing image of the losing pattern, as shown in FIG. 69(h), the image indicating the mission failure is finally Then, as shown in FIG. 69(i), effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stopped and displayed in a combination that notifies a loss. On the other hand, in the development image of the jackpot pattern, as shown in FIG. 70(h), an image indicating the success of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 70(i), the production patterns 210a, 210b, 210c is stopped and displayed in combination to notify a jackpot.

In addition, the reach development production includes, for example, as described above, a mission production in which a development image of the mission challenge is displayed, and a battle production in which a development image in which an ally character and an enemy character compete against each other is displayed. It is being The mission production includes a plurality of execution patterns with different mission contents, and the battle production includes a plurality of execution patterns with different characters appearing and fighting methods. In addition, as mentioned above, the execution patterns of mission performances are broadly divided into the jackpot pattern where the mission is completed and the losing pattern where the mission fails, but the execution pattern of the battle performance is also similar. The game can be roughly divided into a jackpot pattern in which the player wins, and a loss pattern in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character.

The jackpot pattern and the loss pattern have the same contents until the final stage of the performance, and differ in terms of whether the ally character wins or loses, or whether the mission is accomplished or not. . Therefore, during the reach development performance, the player cannot identify the result of the big winning lottery until the end of the variable performance, and the player is given a sense of expectation of a jackpot.

Note that the jackpot pattern is selected only when the result of the big winning lottery is a jackpot, and the losing pattern is selected only when the result of the big winning lottery is a loss. However, in one fluctuating performance, the reach development performance may be executed twice. In this case, the first reach development performance is performed with a losing pattern, and the second reach development performance is performed with a losing pattern. Or run in a jackpot pattern. Below, the flow of the performance when the reach development performance is executed twice in one fluctuating performance will be explained.

FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable performance when the reach development performance according to the performance reference example is executed twice. For example, suppose that after the performance symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in a ready-to-win mode, a mission performance is executed as shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b). Up to this point, there is no difference from the case where the reach development effect is executed only once in one variable effect, but immediately after it is announced that the mission could not be achieved, as shown in FIG. 71(c). , "REACH UP" is displayed on the main performance display section 200a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(d), the main effect display section 200a displays a developed image for battle effects, and the second reach development effect is started. This developed image for battle production is a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, and when a jackpot is won, the ally character ultimately wins against the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 71(e). , as shown in FIG. 71(f), effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stopped and displayed in combination to notify a jackpot. On the other hand, in the event of a loss, as shown in FIG. 71(g), the ally character is ultimately defeated by the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. 71(h), the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c notify the loss. The combination will stop and display.

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation production of a pseudo continuous reach variation pattern according to a production reference example. As shown in FIG. 72(a), as shown in FIG. 72(a), as shown in FIG. 72(a), when the variable display of the presentation symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is started, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the variation effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern is 210b and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo modes. In this pseudo mode, for example, the same performance symbols 210a and 210b and a performance symbol 210c having a number "2" larger than these performance symbols 210a and 210b are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo mode, the variable display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is restarted, as shown in FIG. 72(c). In other words, it can be said that the pseudo mode shows a re-variable display of the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72(d), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed again in a pseudo mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72(e), when the variable display of the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is restarted, the production symbols 210a, 210c are displayed in a ready-to-reach manner as shown in FIG. 72(f), Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 72(g) to (i), a reach development effect is executed in the same way as the developed reach variation pattern, and the result of the big winning lottery is notified to the player.

In this way, the variation performance of the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is different from the variation production of the developed reach variation pattern until the production symbols 210a and 210c become the reach mode, and after reaching the reach mode, the variation production of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern is different from the variation production of the developed reach variation pattern. The variable performance will proceed in the same way as the reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern, there are multiple fluctuating display patterns of the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c until reaching the ready state, and for each variation display pattern, the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped. The number of times of display, in other words, the number of times of variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are different. This fluctuating display pattern is determined by the fluctuating mode command. The selection ratio of the variable mode commands at the time of winning a jackpot and at the time of losing is set so that the selection ratio (referred to as "degree") becomes high.

Specifically, if the result of the big winning lottery is a jackpot, the selection ratio of variable mode commands with a large number of variable displays is set higher than the selection ratio of variable mode commands with a small number of variable displays, When the result of the big winning lottery is a loss, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable displays is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable displays.

Moreover, in the main control board 300, the reliability of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern is set to be higher than the reliability of the developed reach variation pattern. Therefore, reliability is suggested by the number of temporary stop displays (fluctuating displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, and the player can expect that the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c will be temporarily stopped displaying (fluctuating displays) more frequently. We will be watching the direction of the performance while hoping that it will be a success.

The above-described execution pattern of the variation effect is determined and executed by the sub-control board 330 based on the variation command determined by the main control board 300. In other words, it can be said that the execution pattern of the variable performance is determined by the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330 working together.

FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a variable performance determination table according to a reference example of performance. FIG. 73(a) shows a first half variable performance determination table, and FIG. 73(b) shows a second half variable performance determination table. As described above, when the major prize lottery is performed in the main control board 300, a variable command is determined based on the result of the major prize lottery, and each determined command is transmitted to the sub control board 330. When the sub-control board 330 receives the variation mode command, it obtains a production random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, and refers to the first half variation production determination table to determine the obtained production random number and the received variation mode command. Based on this, the execution pattern of the first half of the variable performance is determined. In addition, upon receiving the variation pattern command, it obtains a production random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, and refers to the latter half variation production determination table, and based on the obtained production random number and the received variation pattern command, Determine the execution pattern for the second half of the variable performance. In addition, in FIG. 73, only a part of the first half variable performance determination table and the second half variable performance determination table are extracted and shown.

As shown in FIG. 73, according to the first half variable effect determination table, the selection ratio for the execution pattern of the first half variable effect is set for each variable mode number (variable mode command), and according to the second half variable effect determination table. For example, for each variation pattern number (variation pattern command), the selection ratio for the execution pattern of the latter half of the variation effect is set. Then, by executing the determined execution patterns of the first half and the second half of the variable performance in combination, one variable performance is executed.

For the fluctuation performance of the no-reach fluctuation pattern, "None" is determined as the first half execution pattern, indicating that the first half fluctuation performance is not executed, and "Normal Loss 1" corresponding to the no-reach fluctuation pattern is determined as the second half execution pattern. , "Normal loss 2", "Special loss 1", and "Special loss 2" are determined. For example, when receiving a variation mode command corresponding to a variation mode number of "01H" indicating that the first half of the variation effect is not executed, the sub control board 330 always determines "None" as the first half execution pattern. At this time, the second half of the variable pattern commands that can be received at the same time is set such that only one of "Normal Loss 1", "Normal Loss 2", "Special Loss 1", and "Special Loss 2" is determined. The selection ratio is set in the variable performance determination table. Therefore, "None" is determined as the execution pattern for the first half, and "Normal loss 1", "Normal loss 2", "Special loss 1", and "Special loss 2" are determined as the execution patterns for the second half. The performance execution pattern will be determined to be the above-mentioned non-reach variable pattern.

On the other hand, for the variation effect of the reach variation pattern, a value other than "none" was determined as the execution pattern for the first half, and one of the reach development effects (indicated by development 1 to 5 in the figure) was determined as the execution pattern for the second half. Executed in case. In other words, in the main performance display section 200a, when a fluctuation performance of a reach fluctuation pattern is executed, a fluctuation mode command corresponding to a fluctuation mode number other than fluctuation mode number = 01H is always received, and the development This means that a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern number determined to be one of 1 to 5 has been received.

Here, in FIG. 73(a), in the first half execution pattern "Normal Reach 1", "Normal Reach 2", etc., the performance symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are in the reach mode among the fluctuation effects of the normal reach variation pattern, respectively. In more detail, it shows the background image and the fluctuating display pattern of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c displayed on the main performance display section 200a until the reach development performance is started. These image patterns are designed in advance to match the time of the variable display of the special symbol associated with the variable mode number. For example, when "Normal reach 1" is determined, the images shown in FIGS. The image shown in (d) will be displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

In addition, in FIG. 73(a), "pseudo 2a" etc. in the first half execution pattern are displayed on the main performance display section 200a among the fluctuation performances of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern until the reach development performance is started. This shows the display pattern of the main variation effect image, that is, the execution pattern of the symbol display effect in which the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a variable manner. For example, "Pseudo 2a" is a pseudo continuous reach variation pattern of "Pseudo 2" in which the number of variation displays of the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is 2 times, and the main variation production image is display pattern a. It shows. In addition, "Pseudo 3b" is a pseudo continuous reach variation pattern of "Pseudo 3" in which the number of variation displays of the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is three times, and the main variation production image is display pattern b. It shows.

In addition, in the first half variation production determination table and the second half variation production determination table shown in FIG. 73, the variation production of the no reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is executed only when the result of the big prize lottery is a loss. , the selection ratio has been set. In addition, the developed reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern are determined both when you lose and when you hit the jackpot, but the developed reach variation pattern has a higher selection ratio when you lose than the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern, and when you hit the jackpot. The selection ratio is set low. In this way, by setting the selection ratio for the time of loss and the time of jackpot, the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is set to have higher reliability than the developed reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, among the pseudo continuous reach variation patterns, the higher the number of pseudos, the higher the selection ratio when hitting the jackpot, and the lower the selection ratio when losing. is being done.

As described above, the general flow of the variable effect is determined by the variable effect determination table, but at the start of the variable effect, the various element effects that make up the variable effect are determined based on the variable mode command or the variable pattern command. Execution capability and execution pattern are further determined. Here, the element effects include, for example, as described above, the variable display of the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c on the main effect display section 200a, the development image displayed on the main effect display section 200a in the reach development effect, Furthermore, it refers to all performances that constitute a variable performance, such as a performance that moves the performance accessory device 202. In the embodiment, preview performances (suggestive performances) are executed at various timings during the fluctuation performance as element performances that constitute the fluctuation performance.

This preview performance is performed on the main performance display section 200a at the start of a variable performance, when the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed again in a variable performance of a pseudo continuous reach variation pattern, and further during a reach development performance. This is a performance in which a predetermined image is displayed on the screen or a performance accessory device 202 is moved at a predetermined timing, and whether or not the performance can be performed and the execution pattern are determined for each preview performance. Each preview performance has multiple types of execution patterns, and for each of the multiple types of execution patterns, a selection ratio is set for each variable pattern command and variable mode command, in other words, for each jackpot winning probability. Expected values are set for each execution pattern depending on the selection ratio.

As explained above, when the sub-control board 330 receives a variation command, the execution pattern of the variation production, whether or not each element production can be executed, and the execution pattern are determined, and the variation production is executed during the variation display of the special symbol. The Rukoto. In this way, the fluctuating performance is performed once for one special symbol fluctuating display, but in the embodiment, a fluctuating performance spanning a plurality of special symbol fluctuating displays is also performed.

FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold display performance according to a reference example of performance. A hold display area 211 is provided at the bottom of the main performance display section 200a. Although not shown in FIGS. 67 to 72, the pending display area 211 is always displayed on the main performance display section 200a even during variable performance or while waiting for a game. During the variable performance, a hold display effect is performed in this hold display area 211. In the hold display performance, the hold display 212a indicating the hold read out to the processing area (0th storage unit) at the time of the big winning lottery, and stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure hold storage area. A first hold display 212b, a second hold display 212c, a third hold display 212d, and a fourth hold display 212e are displayed in the hold display area 211, respectively indicating the hold being held. Note that, hereinafter, the hold display 212a and the first hold display 212b to the fourth hold display 212e are collectively referred to as the hold display 212.

For example, when the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and four special 1 pendings are stored in the main RAM 300c, as shown in FIG. 74(a), the pending display 212a, the first pending display A total of five pending displays 212, 212b to 4th pending display 212e, are displayed in the pending display area 211. Then, from this state, the variable display of the special symbols is finished, the special 1 pending stored in the first storage section is read out to the processing area (0th storage section), a big prize lottery is carried out, and the main RAM 300c When the hold shift process is executed, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the hold display 212a is erased, and the first hold display 212b to fourth hold display 212e are moved one place to the left. . Furthermore, when the next special 1 hold is read out from this state, each hold display 212 is further moved and displayed as shown in FIG. 74(c). In this way, the hold display performance is a performance that notifies the player of the number of Special 1 holds stored in the main RAM 300c.

Further, a plurality of display patterns of the hold display 212 are provided, and the display color is made different for each display pattern. In the main control board 300, when the hold is stored, the performance determination process at the time of acquisition (step S536) is executed, and the fluctuation information determined when the newly stored hold is read out to the 0th storage unit. A prefetch designation command indicating the following is sent to the sub control board 330. When the sub control board 330 receives the prefetch designation command, it determines the display pattern of the hold display 212 corresponding to the newly stored hold based on the received command. At this time, the selection ratio of each display pattern is set for each prefetch designation command, that is, for each variation information determined when the newly stored reservation is read out in the big winning lottery. In other words, since the selection ratio of each display pattern is set depending on whether the jackpot is won or not and the execution pattern of the variable effect, the reliability (expected value) of the jackpot is suggested by the display pattern of the pending display 212. That will happen.

FIG. 75(a) is a diagram for explaining the final pending display pattern determination table, and FIG. 75(b) is a diagram for explaining the previous pending display pattern determining table. As described above, in the performance determination process at the time of acquisition in the main control board 300, the sub control board 330 sends a read-ahead designation command indicating the fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern number to be determined when a newly stored hold is read out. Send to. In other words, the pre-read designation command is a command that transmits to the sub-control board 330 the variation mode number and variation pattern number that are determined when the reservation is read. According to the final pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the pending display 212 is set for each prefetch designation command (variation pattern number), and when the prefetch designation command is received, the final display pattern of the pending display 212 is set. The display pattern, that is, the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined.

According to the final pending display pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the eight types of display patterns "Rainbow)" is determined. Then, when the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined, the display pattern of the pending display 212 displayed before that is determined by referring to the previous pending display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75(b). Determined by According to this previous pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the pending display 212 to be displayed before the moving display is set for each display pattern of the pending display 212.

For example, in the main control board 300, when a hold is stored in the second storage section of the first special figure hold storage area, the final hold display pattern determination table is referred to, and the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined. Suppose that is determined. In this case, next, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined with reference to the previous hold display pattern determination table. At this time, the display pattern of the first pending display 212b is determined based on the final display pattern of the previously determined pending display 212a. For example, when the final display pattern of the relevant hold display 212a is "blue", according to the previous hold display pattern determination table, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is "blinking" at 200/250. "Blue" is determined with a probability of 50/250.

In this way, when the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined, next, the previous hold display pattern determination table is again determined based on the display pattern of the first hold display 212b determined previously. With reference to this, the display pattern of the second hold display 212c is determined.

As described above, when a hold is stored, first, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined, and then, based on the determined final display pattern of the hold display 212a, the first hold is Display patterns are sequentially determined so that the display order is reversed, such as the display pattern of display 212b being determined. According to the previous pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio is set so that only the display pattern that is the same as the previously determined display pattern of the pending display 212 or has low reliability is determined. has been done.

As described above, in the hold display effect, a plurality of display patterns are provided for the hold display 212 with different expected values for giving a predetermined gaming profit. The pending display 212 may be displayed in one display pattern from when it is first displayed on the main effect display section 200a until it is finally erased, or the display pattern may change during the display period. In some cases.

In the production reference example, the timing at which the display pattern of the hold display 212 changes is when the newly stored special 1 hold (hereinafter also referred to as target hold) is moved to the first hold display 212b to the third hold display 212d. It can be roughly divided into the timing when the target is suspended, and the timing when the target is being changed due to the target being put on hold.

Next, processing in the sub-control board 330 for executing the above-mentioned variation effect will be explained. Note that, in the following, among the processes in the sub-control board 330, a description of processes that are unrelated to the variable performance will be omitted.

(Sub CPU initialization process of sub control board 330)
FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating the sub CPU initialization process (S1000) of the sub control board 330 according to the production reference example.

(Step S1000-1)
When the power is turned on, the sub CPU 330a reads a CPU initialization processing program from the sub ROM 330b, and also initializes and sets flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 330c.

(Step S1000-3)
Next, the sub CPU 330a performs a process of updating each performance random number, and thereafter repeatedly performs the process of step S1000-3 until an interrupt process is performed. Note that a plurality of types of performance random numbers are provided, and here, each performance random number is updated asynchronously.

(Sub-timer interrupt processing of sub-control board 330)
FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating the sub-timer interrupt processing (S1100) of the sub-control board 330 according to the production reference example. The sub-control board 330 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) that generates clock pulses at a predetermined period (30 times per second). Upon generation of a clock pulse by this reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub CPU 330a reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the sub timer interrupt processing.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the register.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub CPU 330a performs processing to permit interrupts.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub CPU 330a performs updating processing of various timer counters used in the sub control board 330. Here, the various timer counters are decremented by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330 is performed, and stop subtraction when they reach 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S1200)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes commands stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 330c, and performs various processes according to the received commands. In the sub control board 330, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 300, a command reception interrupt process is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is stored in a reception buffer. Here, the command stored in the reception buffer by command reception interrupt processing is analyzed.

(Step S1100-7)
The sub CPU 330a performs time schedule management processing that refers to the timetable and executes processing corresponding to the corresponding time stored in the timetable. Here, based on the time data set in the timetable, various flags are turned on and off, or commands are sent to each production device to perform various effects such as variable production and major production. It will control the execution of the performance.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub CPU 330a restores the register and ends the sub timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch designation command reception process according to a presentation reference example that is executed when a prefetch designation command is received, among the command analysis processes described above. As described above, the prefetch designation command (prefetch designation variation pattern command) is set in the main control board 300 in the performance determination process at the time of acquisition (steps S536-21, S536-25, and S536-27 in FIG. 40). Thereafter, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by sub-command transmission processing (step S100-65 in FIG. 30).

(Step S1210-1)
The sub CPU 330a first analyzes the received prefetch designation command.

(Step S1210-3)
The sub CPU 330a stores the preliminary determination information based on the analysis result of step S1210-1 above. Note that the sub RAM 330c of the sub control board 330 includes a first preliminary determination information storage section corresponding to the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control board 300, and a second preliminary determination information storage section corresponding to the second special symbol reservation storage area. An information storage section is provided. The first preliminary determination information storage section includes four storage sections: a first storage section to a fourth storage section. The first storage section to the fourth storage section of the first preliminary determination information storage section correspond to the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, respectively. Similarly, the second preliminary determination information storage section includes four storage sections, first to fourth storage sections, and the first to fourth storage sections of the second preliminary determination information storage section are as follows: They respectively correspond to the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the second special figure reservation storage area. Here, among the first to fourth storage sections of the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control board 300, the storage section corresponding to the storage section in which the reservation is newly stored is selected. Pre-determination information is stored in .

(Step S1210-5)
The sub CPU 330a performs a final pending display pattern determination process to determine the final display pattern of the pending display 212. Here, based on the received prefetch designation command, the final pending display pattern determination table (FIG. 75(a)) is referred to, and the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined and stored.

(Step S1210-7)
The sub CPU 330a derives the number of times to determine the display pattern of the hold display 212, that is, the change timing of the hold display 212, based on the storage unit in which the hold is stored, and updates the previous hold display pattern determination table by the derived number of times. With reference to (FIG. 75(b)), the display pattern of the hold display 212 is determined. Then, the display pattern information of the determined hold display 212 is stored in a predetermined storage section, and the process moves to step S1210-9.

(Step S1210-9)
The sub CPU 330a performs a hold display start process to start displaying the hold display 212 based on the decisions in steps S1210-5 and S1210-7, and ends the prefetch designation command reception process. As a result, when the hold is stored, the display of the corresponding hold display 212 is started.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating a variable command receiving process executed when a variable command is received, among the above command analysis processes related to the reference example of performance. As described above, the variation command is set in the main control board 300 in the special symbol variation number determination process (steps S612-13 and S612-17 in FIG. 46), and then in the subcommand transmission process (step S100 in FIG. 30). 65) to the sub control board 330.

(Step S1220-1)
Upon receiving the variation command, the sub CPU 330a first analyzes and stores the received variation pattern command.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and determines the execution pattern of the latter half of the variable effect based on the obtained effect random number and the analysis result in step S1220-1. Decide, remember.

(Step S1220-5)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes and stores the received variable mode command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and determines the execution pattern of the first half of the variable effect based on the obtained effect random number and the analysis result in step S1220-5. Decide, remember.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the performance random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3 above for each preview performance, and based on the acquired performance random number and the analysis results in steps S1220-1 and S1220-5 above. , and determines and stores whether or not each preview performance is to be executed and the execution pattern by referring to each preview performance determination table.

(Step S1220-11)
The sub CPU 330a executes a shift process to shift the preliminary determination information stored in the preliminary determination information storage section. Here, when starting a variable effect based on special 1 suspension, the preliminary determination information stored in the fourth storage section to the second storage section of the first preliminary determination information storage section is replaced with the first preliminary determination information. When shifting to the third storage section to the first storage section of the storage section and starting a variable performance based on special 2 suspension, the information is stored in the fourth storage section to the second storage section of the second preliminary determination information storage section. The pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information is shifted to the third storage section to the first storage section of the second pre-determination information storage section, respectively.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub CPU 330a performs a hold display shift process to move and display the hold display 212. Moreover, here, when the display pattern of the hold display 212 changes, execution data for changing the display pattern at a predetermined timing is set.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub CPU 330a sets the time data of the time table based on the decisions made in each of the above steps, and ends the variable command reception process. In addition, based on the timetable set here, in step S1100-7, processing for displaying images for variable effects on the main effect display section 200a, audio output processing, lighting control processing for the effect lighting device 204, etc. Performance execution control will be performed.

<Slot machine 400>
As shown in the external views of FIGS. 80 and 81, the slot machine 400 as a gaming machine includes a casing 402 with an open front, and a front surface that is rotatably arranged vertically in one end of the casing 402. An upper door 404 and a lower front door 406 are provided. A colorless and transparent pattern display window 408 made of a glass plate, a transparent resin plate, etc. is provided at approximately the center of the lower part of the front upper door 404, and at a position corresponding to the pattern display window 408 in the housing 402. , three reels 410 (left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, right reel 410c) are provided so as to be rotatable independently. On the outer peripheral surfaces of the left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c, as shown in the pattern arrangement of FIG. 82(a), a plurality of types of symbols are arranged in each area divided into 20 equal parts, Through the symbol display window 408, the player can visually recognize three consecutive symbols on the left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c, located in the upper, middle, and lower rows, for a total of nine symbols.

An operation unit installation base 412 is formed on the upper part of the lower front door 406, and the operation unit installation base 412 is provided with a medal insertion unit 414, a bet switch 416, a start switch 418, a stop switch 420, a performance switch 422, etc. There is. The medal insertion unit 414 accepts the insertion of medals as gaming value through the medal insertion slot 414a. The bet switch 416 inserts (bets) a specified number of medals required for one game among the medals electrically stored (hereinafter simply referred to as credits) inside the slot machine 400.

The start switch 418 is constituted by a lever capable of detecting a tilting operation, for example, and detects a game start operation by a player. The stop switches 420 (stop switch 420a, stop switch 420b, stop switch 420c) are provided corresponding to the left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c, respectively, and detect the player's stop operation. Note that when the stop switch 420 can be stopped, the first stop operation by the player on any one of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c is called a first stop, and the first stop is called a first stop. After that, operating one of the two stop switches 420 that has not been stopped is called a second stop, and after the second stop, operating the last remaining stop switch 420 is called a third stop. . The production switch 422 is composed of, for example, a press switch and a jog dial switch rotatably arranged around the press switch, and detects the player's press operation or rotation operation.

A liquid crystal display section 424 is provided approximately in the upper center of the front upper door 404 to display various images associated with the performance. In addition, on the upper part and on the left and right sides of the front upper door 404, display lamps 426 made of, for example, high-intensity light emitting diodes (LEDs) are provided. In addition, speakers 428 are provided at the left and right positions of the liquid crystal display section 424 on the back surface of the upper front door 404 and at the left and right positions on the back surface of the lower front door 406, for providing auditory effects such as sound effects and musical sounds.

The operation unit installation base 412 is provided with a main credit display section 430 and a main payout display section 432. Furthermore, a sub-credit display section 434 and a sub-payout display section 436 are provided between the symbol display window 408 and the operation section installation stand 412. The main credit display section 430 and sub-credit display section 434 display the number of credited medals (credit number), and the main payout display section 432 and sub-payout display section 436 display the number of medals to be paid out. .

A medal dispensing device (medal hopper) 442 for dispensing medals from a medal discharging port 440a is provided below the reel 410 in the housing 402. Further, a receiving tray portion 440 for storing medals dispensed from the medal ejection port 440a is provided at the lower front of the lower front door 406. Further, a power switch 444 is provided inside the housing 402. The power switch 444 is operated by an administrator who manages the slot machine 400 and is used to switch between two states: a power-off state and a power-on state.

Further, inside the housing 402, a setting key and a setting change switch (not shown) (together referred to as setting value setting means) are provided on a main control board 500, which will be described later. In the slot machine 400, when the power is turned on via the power switch 444 with a predetermined key (operation key) inserted into the setting key and rotated from the OFF position to the ON position, the slot machine 400 shifts to the setting change mode. , the setting value can be changed (also simply referred to as setting change). The set value is a stepwise representation of the player's advantage (mechanical split), and is expressed in 6 levels from 1 to 6, for example. Generally, the larger the set value, the more advantageous the game is as a whole. It is set to be high (expected number of acquisitions is high). Then, each time the setting change switch is pressed in a state where settings can be changed, the setting value is incremented by 1, and the setting value is changed to one of the six setting values, for example, and the start switch 418 is operated. Then, the setting value is determined, and by returning the setting key to its original position (OFF position), the setting change mode ends and the game becomes possible. Note that the settings can only be changed for a certain period of time after the power switch 444 is operated and the power is turned on.

In the slot machine 400, when a game can be started and a specified number of medals are bet, the active line A becomes active and the operation on the start switch 418 becomes active. Here, bets can be placed in two cases: by inserting credited medals through the operation of the bet switch 416, by inserting medals through the medal inserter 414, and by placing a replay combination, which will be described in detail later, on the active line A. This includes any case where medals are automatically inserted based on the situation. Further, the active line A is a line for determining whether or not a winning combination has been won, and in this embodiment, there is only one active line A. As shown in FIG. 82(b), the active line A is the middle row of the left reel 410a, the middle row of the middle reel 410b, and The line is set to connect the positions corresponding to the symbols that stop at the top of the right reel 410c. The invalid line is used to determine the winning combination when it is difficult to understand the winning combination only by the symbol combination displayed on the active line A, and displays other symbol combinations that make it easier to understand the winning combination. In this embodiment, five invalid lines B1, B2, B3, C1, and C2 shown in FIG. 82(b) are assumed.

Then, when the start switch 418 is operated by the player, the game is started, the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c are rotated, and a winning type lottery and the like are executed. Thereafter, the corresponding left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c are respectively stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c. Then, if a winning combination that can receive a medal payout is won based on the lottery result of the winning type lottery and the combination of symbols displayed on the active line A, a medal payout will be executed, and the winning type that can receive a medal payout will be executed. If the player does not win or wins but does not win, the game ends when the left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c all stop.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned one game includes the insertion of medals through the medal insertion unit 414, the insertion of credited medals through the operation of the bet switch 416, or the replay combination displayed on the active line A. After one of the automatic medal insertions based on this is performed, the rotation of the left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c is controlled in response to the player's operation of the start switch 418, and a winning type lottery is executed. The left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel corresponding to the operated stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c are then displayed in accordance with the lottery results of the winning type lottery and the operation of the plurality of stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c by the player. 410c is controlled to stop, and when a winning combination that can receive a payout of medals is won, it refers to the game until the payout of the medals is executed. In addition, if the winning type for which medals can be paid out is not won, or if the player wins but does not win, one game ends when the left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c all stop. However, the start of one game may be read as the operation of the start switch 418 by the player instead of the above-described insertion of medals or winning of a replay combination. Further, the number of times such one game is repeated is defined as the number of games.

FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing a schematic electrical configuration of the slot machine 400. As shown in FIG. 83, the slot machine 400 includes a main control board 500 (main control section) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board 502 (sub-control section) that controls the effects according to the progress of the game. A control board is provided that includes a control board. Furthermore, transmission of electrical signals between the main control board 500 and the sub-control board 502 is limited to only one direction, from the main control board 500 to the sub-control board 502, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention and the like.

(Main control board 500)
The main control board 500 has a semiconductor integrated circuit including a main CPU 500a as a central processing unit, a main ROM 500b storing programs etc., a main RAM 500c functioning as a work area, etc., and controls the entire slot machine 400 in an integrated manner. . Note that even if the power is turned off, the data in the main RAM 500c is retained without being erased unless the settings are changed and the RAM is cleared.

The main control board 500 also includes an initialization means 600, a bet means 602, a winning type lottery means 604, and a reel control means, which function when the main CPU 500a cooperates with the main RAM 500c based on a program stored in the main ROM 500b. 606, determination means 608, payout control means 610, game state control means 612, performance state control means 614, command transmission means 616, and other functional units.

The main control board 500 receives various detection signals from an inserted medal detection unit 414b that detects the insertion of medals into the medal slot 414a, a bet switch 416, a start switch 418, and stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c. Based on the received detection signal, the main CPU 500a executes various processes.

Initialization means 600 executes initialization processing in main control board 500. The betting means 602 bets medals to be used in games. Based on the operation of the start switch 418, the winning type lottery means 604 performs a winning type lottery to determine the validity of the winning combination, more specifically, the validity of the winning type including the winning combination, as will be described in detail later.

The reel control means 606 controls the rotation of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c in response to the operation of the start switch 418, and controls the rotation of the left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c, respectively. In response to the operation of stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c, the corresponding left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c are controlled to stop. In addition, the reel control means 606 activates the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c in the previous game in response to the operation of the start switch 418, and then displays the lottery results of the winning type lottery by the player. The time until the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c is enabled (invalidated by the completion of the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c in the previous game) is extended from the specified time, and during that time, the reel 410a , 410b, and 410c may be rotated in various ways (freeze effect). Reel effects include not enabling a switch that should have been enabled for a predetermined period of time, suspending a process that should have been executed for a predetermined period of time, or causing signals from a switch that should have been sent or received to be sent or received for a predetermined period of time. This can be achieved by not having it.

Further, a reel drive control section 450 is connected to the main control board 500. The reel drive control unit 450 drives the stepping motor 452 based on rotation start signals for the left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c transmitted from the reel control means 606 in response to the operation signal of the start switch 418. do. In addition, the reel drive control unit 450 detects stop signals for each of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c and the rotational position detection circuit 454, which are transmitted from the reel control means 606 in response to the operation signal of the stop switch 420. Based on the signal, driving of the stepping motor 452 is stopped.

The determining means 608 determines whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been displayed on the active line A. Here, the display of a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination on the active line A may simply be called winning. The payout control means 610 pays out medals in the number (value amount) corresponding to the winning combination based on the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination being displayed on the active line A (winning). Further, a medal payout device 442 is connected to the main control board 500, and the payout control means 610 dispenses the medals while counting the number of medals to be paid out.

The game state control means 612 refers to the result of the winning type lottery and the determination result of the determination means 608, and shifts the game state to one of a plurality of types of game states. Further, the performance state control means 614 refers to the result of the winning type lottery, the determination result of the determination means 608, and the transition information of the game state, and shifts the performance state to one of a plurality of types of performance states.

The command transmitting means 616 sends commands related to games associated with the operations of the betting means 602, winning type lottery means 604, reel control means 606, determination means 608, payout control means 610, game state control means 612, performance state control means 614, etc. are sequentially determined, and the determined commands are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control board 502.

Further, the main control board 500 is provided with a random number generator (random number generation means) 500d. The random number generator 500d sequentially increments the count value, loops it within a predetermined numerical range, and obtains a random number by extracting the count value at a predetermined time point. The random numbers generated by the random number generator 500d of the main control board 500 (hereinafter referred to as winning type lottery random numbers) are used to determine the gaming profit to be given to the player, for example, by the winning type lottery means 604 to determine the winning type. .

(Sub control board 502)
Further, like the main control board 500, the sub control board 502 has various semiconductor integrated circuits including a sub CPU 502a which is a central processing unit, a sub ROM 502b storing programs etc., and a sub RAM 502c which functions as a work area. , particularly controls the presentation based on commands from the main control board 500. Further, like the main RAM 500c, the sub RAM 502c is also connected to a backup power source (not shown), and even if the power is cut off, the data is retained without being erased. Note that the sub control board 502 is also provided with a random number generator (random number generation means) 502d, like the main control board 500, and the random numbers (hereinafter referred to as performance lottery random numbers) generated by the random number generator 502d are generated by the main control board 502. It is used to determine the mode of presentation.

In addition, in the sub control board 502, the sub CPU 502a operates an initialization determining means 630, a command receiving means 632, an effect controlling means 634, etc., which function by cooperating with the sub RAM 502c based on the program stored in the sub ROM 502b. It has a functional part.

Initialization determining means 630 executes initialization processing in sub control board 502. The command receiving means 632 receives commands from other control boards, such as the main control board 500, and processes the commands. The performance control means 634 receives the detection signal from the performance switch 422, and determines the performance of the game to be performed on each device of the liquid crystal display section 424, the speaker 428, and the performance lamp 426 based on the received command. Specifically, the production control means 634 controls the image data displayed on the liquid crystal display section 424 and the electricity for production through illumination devices such as the production lamp 426, the sub-credit display section 434, and the sub-payout display section 436. Decoration data is determined, and at the same time, audio data constituting the audio to be output from the speaker 428 is determined. Then, the performance control means 634 executes the determined game performance. Note that the production also includes auxiliary production. In the winning type lottery, when a selected winning type in which a correct winning combination (a specific winning combination) and an incorrect winning combination overlap is won, the correct answer of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c, which is the winning condition for the correct winning combination, is used. This is a performance that notifies you of the operation mode. With this auxiliary performance, the player can easily display the symbol combination corresponding to the correct winning combination on the active line A. A performance state in which such an auxiliary performance is executed is called an AT (assist time) performance state. In addition, a so-called ART gaming state may be used in which an AT performance state and an RT (replay time) gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay combination is high are proceeded in parallel.

In the following, notifications managed by boards other than the main control board 500, including the sub-control board 502, such as the liquid crystal display section 424, the production lamp 426, the speaker 428, the sub-credit display section 434, and the sub-payout display section 436, will be described. The means may be referred to as other notification means. On the other hand, notification means managed by the main control board 500, such as the main credit display section 430 and the main payout display section 432, may be referred to as main notification means (instruction monitor). Further, the main notification means and other notification means capable of executing the auxiliary performance may be collectively referred to as auxiliary performance execution means. The performance state control means 614 causes the auxiliary performance execution means to execute the auxiliary performance in the AT performance state.

(Table used in main control board 500)
FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning combination, and FIGS. 85 and 86 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the winning type lottery table.

In the slot machine 400, as will be described in detail later, a plurality of types of gaming states and performance states are provided, and the gaming state and performance state are changed according to the progress of the game. In the main control board 500, a plurality of winning type lottery tables and the like corresponding to gaming states managed and controlled by the gaming state control means 612 are stored in the main ROM 500b. The winning type lottery means 604 draws a corresponding winning type lottery table into the main ROM 500b according to the current setting value (which shows the ease of obtaining a gaming profit in stages) stored in the main RAM 500c and the current gaming state. Based on the extracted winning type lottery table, it is determined which winning type lottery random number acquired in response to the operation signal of the start switch 418 corresponds to which winning type in the winning type lottery table.

Here, the winning combinations constituting the winning types extracted in the winning type lottery table include a replay winning combination, a minor winning combination, and a bonus winning combination. The replay combination is a combination that allows the player to play the game again without making a new bet for medals when a symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed on the active line A. A small winning combination is a winning combination in which a symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is displayed on the active line A, so that a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the symbol combination. In addition, for a bonus role, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed on the active line A, thereby changing the gaming state managed by the gaming state control means 612 to a bonus gaming state (a gaming state during RBB operation, which will be described later). This is a role that can be transitioned to.

As for the winning combinations in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84, winning combinations "Replay 1" to "Replay 7" are provided as replay combinations. In addition, as small roles, winning roles "Small Role 1" to "Small Role 39" are provided. In addition, a winning combination "RBB" is provided as a bonus combination. In FIG. 84, one or more symbols constituting each winning combination are associated with each of the left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c.

Here, in this embodiment, when the stop switch 420 is operated by the player, if the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination that can be won are on the active line A, the reel control means In step 606, stop control is performed so that the symbol stops on the active line A. In addition, when the stop switch 420 is operated, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination that can be won are not on the active line A, but four symbols in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel 410 are displayed. If it is within the range (draw-in range) corresponding to the winning combination, the reel control means 606 controls the number of symbols that are apart from each other to become the number of sliding symbols, and activates the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination. Stop control is performed so that the rotation is maintained for the number of sliding frames so as to be drawn onto line A, and then stopped. In addition, if there are multiple symbols on the reels 410 that correspond to winning combinations that can be won, and all of them are within the pull-in range of the reels 410, any symbol is selected from the active line A according to a predetermined priority order. It is determined whether to draw the symbol upward, and stop control is performed so that the rotation is maintained for the number of sliding pieces so as to draw the prioritized symbol onto the active line A and then stopped. Note that when the stop switch 420 is pressed and a symbol that constitutes a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination other than a winning combination that can be won is on the active line A, the reel control means 606 controls the symbol combination to A so-called kicking process is also executed in parallel to prevent the line from stopping on the effective line A. Furthermore, as will be described later, if the winning combination included in the winning type has an operation mode (operation order or operation timing) set as a winning condition, the reel control means 606 controls the winning combination according to the player's operation mode. Stop control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol combination can be displayed on the active line A.

For example, the symbols forming symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations "Replay 1" to "Replay 4", the winning combinations "Small Role 1" to "Small Role 6", and "Small Role 35" to "Small Role 39" are arranged on each reel 410 so that they can always be displayed on the active line A by the above-mentioned stop control. Such a winning combination may be expressed as PB=1. On the other hand, for example, the symbols constituting the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations "Replay 5" to "Replay 7", the winning combinations "Small combination 7" to "Small combination 34", and the winning combination "RBB" are displayed on each reel 410. Due to the above-mentioned stop control, since the images are not necessarily arranged so as to be displayable on the effective line A, so-called dropouts may occur. Such a winning combination may be expressed as PB≠1.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, in the winning type lottery table, multiple winning areas are divided, and depending on each game state, the winning types that are subject to lottery differ, and the presence or absence of non-winning (loss) differs. or In FIGS. 85 and 86, the winning areas ( Although the winning type (winning type) is represented by "◎" or "○", in reality, a winning type lottery table corresponding to each of a plurality of gaming states is stored in the main ROM 500b. In addition, "◎" indicates that it is an advantageous section lottery possible winning type where a lottery to move to an advantageous section can be held, and "○" is a non-advantageous section lottery where it is impossible to conduct a lottery to transfer to an advantageous section. Indicates that it is a winning type.

In the winning type lottery table, each divided winning area is associated with a predetermined number (winning range value) that is a numerical value indicating the winning range, and the winning type. The total number of winning type lottery random numbers (65536) is obtained by summing up the numbers placed in the winning areas. Therefore, the probability that each winning type is determined is the value obtained by dividing the number associated with the winning area by the total number of winning type lottery random numbers. The winning type lottery means 604 sequentially acquires numbers from among the winning areas in the winning type lottery table with the highest number based on the gaming state at that time, and uses the numbers as winning type lottery random numbers. When the value after subtraction becomes less than 0, the winning type associated with the winning area at that time is determined as the lottery result of the winning type lottery. In addition, if the numbers of all the winning areas of winning area 1 and above are subtracted from the winning type lottery random number, and the value after subtraction is 0 or more, the winning type of winning area 0 is "lose". This is the lottery result.

Here, we will supplement the winning combination "RBB" that constitutes the winning type "RBB". The predetermined type 1 special accessory RB is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winnings for each specified number, or increases the probability that a conditional device related to winnings for each specified number will operate, and is predetermined. It is said to be able to operate when the game is played and continue to operate until the result of the game is obtained not more than 12 times. Here, the condition device is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for displaying a combination of symbols related to winning, replay, accessory, or operation of the accessory continuous operation device, A winning flag is a flag that is activated when a player wins a computer-based lottery held in a gaming machine. And, the accessory continuous activation device (winning combination "RBB") related to the first type special accessory that constitutes the winning type "RBB" is a device that can continuously operate the first type special accessory RB. This refers to a device that operates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and ends the operation in a predetermined case.

According to the winning type lottery table in FIG. 85, for example, winning area 0 is associated with the winning type "Lose", and when winning in such winning type, the symbol corresponding to any of the winning combinations shown in FIG. The combination is also not displayed on the active line A, and no medals are paid out. However, as will be described later, if the RBB internal winning flag is carried over to the next game, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" may be displayed on the active line A due to the winning type "Lose". It becomes possible.

Furthermore, the winning area 1 is associated with the winning type "Small role ALL" which includes the winning roles "Small role 1" to "Small role 39" overlappingly, and the winning area 2 is associated with the winning type "Small role ALL" which includes the winning role "Small role 1" to "Small role 39" overlappingly. The winning type "1 piece ALLA" which includes the winning combinations "Small prize 11" to "Small prize 39" is associated with the winning type "1 piece ALLA", and the winning combinations "Small prize 12" to "Small prize 27" are included in the winning area 3. The winning type "1 ticket ALLB" which is included twice is associated. In addition, the winning area 4 is associated with the winning type "1 Choice 1" which includes the winning combinations "Small Win 12" and "Small Win 20", and the winning area 5 is associated with the winning combination "Small Win 12" and "Small Win 20". The winning type ``Choice 1 2'' which includes duplicate winning combinations ``Win 13'' and ``Small Win 21'' is associated with the winning type ``Choice 1 2'', which includes duplicate winning combinations ``Small Win 14'' and ``Small Win 22'' in winning area 6. In the winning area 7, there is a winning type "1 choice 4" which includes the winning combinations "Small role 15" and "Small role 23" in duplicate. are associated. In addition, the winning area 8 is associated with the winning type "weak cherry" which includes the winning combinations "small winning combination 35" and "small winning combination 36", and the winning area 9 is associated with the winning winning combination "small winning combination 35" and "small winning combination 36". ” to “Small win 39” are associated with the winning type “Strong Cherry” which is duplicated, and in the winning area 10, the winning winnings “Small win 7”, “Small win 8”, and “Small win 11” are included. The winning type "Watermelon A" which is duplicated is associated with the winning type "Watermelon A", and the winning type "Watermelon B" which is duplicated with the winning combinations "Small Win 7" to "Small Win 10" is associated with the winning area 11. The winning area 12 is associated with the winning type "Strong Bell" which includes the winning winning combinations "Small winning combination 1", "Small winning combination 3", and "Small winning winning combination 5" overlappingly. In addition, the winning area 13 is associated with the winning type "Common Bell A" which includes the winning combinations "Small Role 1" to "Small Role 6" overlappingly, and the winning area 14 is associated with the winning type "Common Bell A" that includes the winning combinations "Small Role 1" to "Small Role 6". 1" to "Small win 6" and "Small win 11" are associated with the winning type "Common Bell B."

In addition, in winning areas 15 to 26, correct winning hands with a payout number of 11 coins (winning winning hands “Small Winner 1” to “Small Winner 6”) and incorrect winning hands with a payout number of 1 coin (winning hands “Small Winner 6”) with a payout number of 1 coin are shown. Selected winning types (winning types ``batting order bell 1A'' to ``batting order bell 6A'', ``batting order bell 1B'' to ``batting order bell 6B'') that include redundant combinations of ``batting order bell 12'' to ``minor role 34'') are associated with each other. It is being

Furthermore, according to the winning type lottery table in FIG. 86, winning areas 27 to 39 include winning types "Symbol Replay A1" to "Symbol Replay A7" in which winning combinations "Replay 1" to "Replay 7" are duplicated. ", "Symbol Replay B1" to "Symbol Replay B6" are associated with each other. Furthermore, the winning area 40 is associated with a winning type "normal replay" which includes the winning combinations "replay 1" and "replay 2" in duplicate.

Furthermore, the winning areas 41 to 46 are associated with winning types "RBB1" to "RBB6" in which the winning combination "RBB" is included alone or in combination with other small winning combinations.

If you win a winning type that includes multiple winning combinations, the winning conditions regarding which symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will be preferentially displayed on the active line A, such as stop The order in which the switches 420a, 420b, and 420c are operated is set.

In the following description, the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c that stop the reels in the order of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c will be referred to as "batting order 1", and The operation of stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c that stop the reels in order is called "batting order 2," and the operation of stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c that stops the reels in order of middle reel 410b, left reel 410a, and right reel 410c is called "batting order." 3", and the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c to stop the reels in the order of the middle reel 410b, right reel 410c, and left reel 410a is "batting order 4", and the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c is set as "batting order 4", and the reels are stopped in the order of the right reel 410c, the left reel 410a, and the middle reel 410b. The operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c to stop the reels is defined as "batting order 5", and the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c to stop the reels in the order of right reel 410c, middle reel 410b, and left reel 410a is "batting order 6". ”.

For example, in a non-internal gaming state, if the winning type "batting order bell 1A" in the winning area 15 is won and the operation is performed according to the correct operation mode (batting order 1), the winning combination is a correct winning combination with a payout number of 11 pieces. Stop control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 1" is preferentially displayed on the active line A. In addition, when the operation is performed according to batting order 2, stop control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "Small combination 28", which is an incorrect combination with a payout number of 1 piece, is preferentially displayed on the active line A. is made and operations are performed in the batting order 3 and 4, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "Small combination 12", which is an incorrect combination with a payout of 1 piece, is preferentially placed on active line A with 1/4 of the winning combination. If the stop control is performed so that the probability is displayed, and the operation is performed according to the batting order of 5 and 6, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "Small combination 16", which is an incorrect combination with a payout number of 1 piece, will be displayed on the active line A. Stop control is performed so that it is preferentially displayed at the top with a probability of 1/4.

It should be noted that the winning probability (number) of each winning type in the winning areas 15 to 26 is set to be equal. Since the player usually cannot know which winning type he has won, by providing the winning areas 15 to 26 as described above, it is difficult to win the correct combination. Furthermore, as described above, even if the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c are operated in a batting order in which an incorrect combination is displayed preferentially, the symbol combination corresponding to the incorrect combination is not necessarily displayed on the active line A. Therefore, depending on the operation mode, spillage may occur (PB≠1).

In addition, when winning one of the above-mentioned winning types, the internal winning flag corresponding to each winning type is established (ON), and the stop control of each reel 410 is performed according to the establishment status of this internal winning flag. The Rukoto. At this time, if you win a winning type that includes a minor winning combination, but the symbol combination corresponding to these winning combinations cannot be displayed on the active line A in the game, after the game ends. The internal winning flag is turned off. In other words, the right to win a minor prize is limited only to the game in which the winning type that includes the minor prize is won, and the right cannot be carried over to the next game. On the other hand, if a winning type that includes the winning combination "RBB" is won, the RBB internal winning flag is established (ON) and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" is placed on the active line A. The RBB internal winning flag is carried over across games until it is displayed. Furthermore, if the internal winning flag corresponding to a winning type that includes a replay combination is established, the symbol combination corresponding to one of the replay combinations included in that winning type will always be on the active line A. After the process necessary to play the next game without requiring medals is performed, the internal winning flag is turned off.

(Transition of gaming state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be explained using FIG. 87. Here, a plurality of gaming states are prepared, such as a non-internal gaming state, an RBB internal gaming state, and an RBB operating gaming state. As will be described later, each gaming state is changed depending on winning, winning (activation), and termination of a bonus combination.

The non-internal gaming state is a gaming state that corresponds to an initial state among a plurality of gaming states. In such a non-internal gaming state, the probability of winning a replay combination is set to approximately 1/7.3. Furthermore, in the non-internal gaming state, the winning combination "RBB" is determined with a predetermined probability (for example, about 1/30).

The gaming state control means 612 changes the gaming state in response to winning of the winning combination "RBB". For example, in a game in which the winning combination "RBB" is won, when a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" is displayed on the active line A, the gaming state control means 612 changes the gaming state to the RBB active gaming state. Transfer (1).

In the RBB active gaming state, the winning probability of the replay combination is set to 0. In addition, in such a gaming state during RBB operation, the winning types that can be won are the winning type "Small win ALL" in the winning area 1, and the winning types "1 piece ALLA" and "1 piece ALLB" in the winning areas 2 and 3. It is set. If you win the winning type "Small role ALL", a symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning roles "Small role 1" to "Small role 39" will be displayed on the active line A, and you will win the winning type "1 piece ALL". Then, the stop control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to any one of the winning combinations "Small Win 11" to "Small Win 39" is displayed on the active line A. Here, due to the configuration of such small winning combinations, the expected number of coins to be acquired per unit game in the gaming state during RBB operation is lowered.

When the termination condition of the RBB active gaming state is met, that is, when the number of acquired coins reaches a predetermined number, the gaming state control means 612 shifts the gaming state to a non-internal gaming state (2).

On the other hand, in a game in which the winning combination "RBB" is won, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" cannot be displayed on the active line A, the gaming state control means 612 controls the gaming state inside the RBB. A transition is made to a medium game state (special game state) (3).

In the RBB internal medium game state, the winning probability of the replay combination is set to approximately 1/5.9. Further, in the RBB internal medium game state, there is no possibility of winning the winning type "losing". In other words, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" could not be displayed on the active line A in a winning game with the winning combination "RBB", after that, the winning combination "RBB" would be smaller than the winning combination "RBB". Since the replay combination is controlled to stop on the active line A with priority, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" cannot be displayed on the active line A. Therefore, once the gaming state shifts to the RBB internal medium gaming state, the RBB internal medium gaming state will be maintained without any subsequent gaming state transition. Here, while maintaining the RBB internal medium gaming state, an AT effect state is realized in the RBB internal medium gaming state.

Here, in the RBB internal medium game state, multiple types of correct combinations are won without overlapping each other, so it is possible to increase the chances of winning the correct combination, and as a result, for example, in the RBB internal medium game By performing the auxiliary performance in the AT performance state, medals can be easily obtained. On the other hand, in the RBB active gaming state, multiple types of correct winning combinations are won over and over again, so there are fewer opportunities to win the correct winning combination, so the correct winning combination is more likely to win than in the AT production state in other gaming states. This makes it difficult for players to increase the number of medals they own. Therefore, while the RBB active gaming state has the function of having a higher probability of winning winning combinations than the RBB internal playing state, in terms of medal acquisition performance, the RBB operating gaming state is the same as the RBB internal mid gaming state. It is possible to realize the specifications (accelerator RBB) that are inferior.

(Transition of production state)
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the presentation state. Hereinafter, the performance states (non-AT performance state, AT performance state) that are transitioned by the performance state control means 614 in the main control board 500 will be described in detail. In the following, a case where the gaming state is the RBB internal medium gaming state will be explained.

Here, in order to comprehensively and uniformly determine whether or not the gaming state with high medal acquisition performance is biased, a game section having performance related to the instruction function, that is, an auxiliary performance (instruction function) is executed. A game section that is advantageous to the player, including a game section, etc., is defined as an advantageous section (specific section). In addition, in the advantageous section, when the auxiliary effect is activated as a result of a lottery etc. related to the activation of the auxiliary effect on the main control board 500, the content of the instruction can be identified on the main control board 500. This is a game period in which instruction information may be transmitted to peripheral boards such as the sub-control board 502 only when displayed on the means. Furthermore, a game section different from the advantageous section is defined as a non-advantageous section. Therefore, the plurality of performance states (non-AT performance state, AT performance state) belong to either the advantageous section or the non-advantageous section which are the game sections. In this embodiment, almost all performance states belong to the advantageous section, and the non-advantageous section is realized in some performance states (here, non-advantageous performance state) of the non-AT performance state.

In addition, in the advantageous section, among the winning modes in which the correct winning combination would be missed if there is no auxiliary performance, in the selection winning type where the correct winning combination has the maximum payout (here, 11 coins), there is an assistance that helps the winning winning of the correct winning combination. When performing a performance (an auxiliary performance in which the maximum number of coins to be paid out can be obtained), the effect must be notified by, for example, lighting up the section display 460.

In addition, in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to vary the winning probability for each winning type depending on the setting value, but the probability that determines the transition to the performance state with auxiliary performance (AT performance state) for the same winning type must not be different for each setting value. On the other hand, in the advantageous section, both the winning probability of the winning type and the probability of determining the transition (or addition) to the performance state with auxiliary performance (AT performance state) for the same winning type differ depending on the setting value. It is possible to do so.

Therefore, the performance state control means 614 not only manages the transition of the performance state, but also manages the transition between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. Furthermore, regardless of such management, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the following termination conditions are met. For example, based on the fact that the value counted in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined value (for example, the number of stayed games (number of games played) has reached 1500 games, or the number of acquired coins (net increase number of coins) has exceeded 2400 coins) to forcefully exit. In either case, the performance state control means 614 resets all the information updated in the advantageous section (all variables that affect the performance related to the instruction function) by transitioning from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. .

(Non-AT performance state, AT performance state)
In the non-AT performance state, the frequency of execution of auxiliary performances is extremely lower than in the AT performance state, and since auxiliary performances are almost never performed, the number of medals that can be acquired is limited. Here, six performance states are provided as non-AT performance states: normal performance state, non-advantageous performance state, preparatory performance state, first interval performance state, continuous lottery performance state, and second interval performance state.

In the AT performance state, by causing the auxiliary performance execution means to perform the auxiliary performance when all selected winning types are won, it is possible to obtain a large number of medals while suppressing the consumption of medals. Therefore, by shifting to the AT performance state, the player can advance the game more advantageously than in the non-AT performance state. Here, a pseudo bonus performance state is provided as the AT performance state. Each performance state (normal performance state, pseudo-bonus performance state, non-advantageous performance state, preparatory performance state, first interval performance state, continuous lottery performance state, and second interval performance state) will be individually explained below.

(Each production state)
The normal performance state is a performance state corresponding to an initial state among a plurality of performance states. The performance state control means 614 performs an AT lottery in the normal performance state. The AT lottery is a lottery that determines transition to the AT performance state, and the performance state control means 614 performs the AT lottery with different probabilities for each winning type determined by the winning type lottery. If the AT lottery is won, the performance state control means 614 shifts the performance state to a pseudo-bonus performance state, which is an AT performance state, after a predetermined number of portent games have elapsed (1). Further, when a predetermined ceiling condition (for example, playing a predetermined number of games in a row in the normal performance state) is satisfied in the normal performance state without transitioning to the pseudo bonus performance state (so-called reaching the ceiling), the performance state control means 614 moves the performance state to a pseudo-bonus performance state (1).

In the pseudo-bonus performance state, the auxiliary performance is executed until a predetermined end condition (for example, the number of played games reaches a predetermined number of games) is met. You can get 3.5 sheets. In addition, in the pseudo-bonus effect state, two ending conditions are mainly prepared. For example, if the end condition is that the number of games played reaches a predetermined number of games, there are two levels of the predetermined number of games, 30 and 80, and one of them is determined by lottery. In the pseudo-bonus effect state, the player will naturally gain more gaming profits as the number of games played increases. Therefore, the player would like the predetermined number of games to be 80 instead of 30. However, even if 30 is determined as the predetermined number of games, a promotion lottery is also held during which the predetermined number of games of the auxiliary performance is increased from 30 to 80. Note that here, as an example, the end condition of the pseudo-bonus performance state is that the number of played games has reached a predetermined number of games, but instead of this, the number of auxiliary performances that can obtain the maximum number of payout coins is set as a predetermined number. It is also possible to adopt a method in which the number of coins is reached, or the number of acquired coins (net increase in the number of coins) reaches a predetermined number.

Then, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the pseudo bonus performance state, the performance state control means 614 may shift the performance state to a non-advantageous performance state (2). At this time, the performance state control means 614 temporarily shifts the advantageous section to a non-advantageous section and resets all the information updated in the advantageous section. For example, if the previous pseudo-bonus performance state is the first pseudo-bonus performance state, that is, if it is a pseudo-bonus performance state immediately after transitioning from the normal performance state, the performance state control means 614 changes the performance state to an unfavorable state. At the same time as transitioning to the production state, the advantageous section is temporarily transferred to a non-advantageous section. Furthermore, even if the previous pseudo-bonus performance state is a pseudo-bonus performance state that is a multiple of 3 (3, 6, ...) without going through the normal performance state, the performance state control means 614 temporarily changes the advantageous section. , and at the same time, the advantageous section is temporarily transferred to the non-advantageous section.

Then, the production state control means 614 selects a lottery with a high probability (for example, 1/2) to shift to the advantageous section, returns to the advantageous section after playing the number game, and shifts the production state to the preparation production state ( 3). This is to avoid forcibly ending the pseudo-bonus effect state when the value counted in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value.

On the other hand, if the previous pseudo-bonus performance state is not the first time, or the pseudo-bonus performance state is not a multiple of 3 without going through the normal performance state, the performance state control means 614 shifts the performance state to a non-advantageous performance state. The process directly shifts to the preparation performance state (4). This is to prevent the pseudo-bonus performance state from being forced to end when the value counted in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, and to prevent the advantageous section from ending unnecessarily.

In the preparation performance state, the performance state control means 614 selects a transition to the first interval performance state by lottery with a high probability (for example, 1/2), and changes the performance state based on the determination of transition to the first interval performance state. is shifted to the first interval presentation state (5).

The first interval performance state continues until a predetermined end condition (for example, 40 games have been played) is met, and during that time, the continuous lottery of the pseudo bonus performance state is executed. In this first interval performance state, unlike the pseudo-bonus performance state, the expected number of coins to be acquired per unit game is small and may be a negative value. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when winning an advantageous section in a non-advantageous section, the presentation state is set to always become the first interval presentation state. Therefore, after the end of the pseudo-bonus performance state, even if the advantageous period continues, even if the transition to the non-advantageous period occurs as described above, the transition to the first interval performance state will occur. becomes. Then, when a predetermined end condition in the first interval performance state is satisfied, the performance state control means 614 shifts the performance state to a continuous lottery performance state (6).

The continuous lottery performance state continues until a predetermined end condition (for example, five games are played) is met, and finally, the result of the continuous lottery in the pseudo bonus performance state in the first interval performance state is announced. Unlike the pseudo-bonus performance state, the continuous lottery performance state also has a small expected number of coins to be acquired per unit game, and may take a negative value. In the first interval performance state, if the transition to (continuation of) the pseudo-bonus performance state is determined, the performance state control means 614 shifts the performance state to the pseudo-bonus performance state (7). If it has not been decided to shift to the normal performance state, the performance state control means 614 returns the performance state to the normal performance state (8).

As described above, in the present embodiment, once the pseudo-bonus performance state is entered, the pseudo-bonus performance state → preparation performance state → first interval performance state → continuous lottery performance state unless the continuous lottery performance state is missed. By repeating the transition, the player can accumulate medals.

In addition, in the preparation performance state, the performance state control means 614 performs a lottery for transition to the second interval performance state in addition to a lottery for transition to the first interval performance state. However, the probability of transition to the second interval performance state (for example, 1/20) is set smaller than the probability of transition to the first interval performance state (for example, 1/2). In the preparatory performance state, if it is determined to transition to the second interval performance state before the transition to the first interval performance state is determined, the performance state control means 614 determines the transition to the second interval performance state. Based on this, the presentation state is shifted to the second interval presentation state (9). Here, an example is given in which a lottery for transition to the second interval performance state is performed in the preparatory performance state, but a lottery for transition to the second interval performance state may be similarly performed in the non-advantageous performance state.

Like the first interval performance state, the second interval performance state continues until a predetermined end condition (for example, 40 games have been played) is met, and during that time, the continuous lottery of the pseudo bonus performance state is executed. Like the first interval performance state, the second interval performance state differs from the pseudo bonus performance state in that the expected number of coins to be acquired per unit game is small and may take a negative value.

However, in the second interval performance state, the pseudo bonus performance state is determined with higher probability than in the first interval performance state. For example, in the first interval performance state, the pseudo-bonus performance state is determined at 1/58 for every game for 40 games (winning probability 50%), and in the second interval performance state, the pseudo-bonus performance state is determined for 40 games. is determined at 1/25 every game (80% probability of winning). Then, when a predetermined end condition is met, the performance state control means 614 shifts the performance state to a continuous lottery performance state (10). In addition, once it is decided to move to the second interval presentation state, thereafter, there will be no transition to the non-advantageous presentation state, the preparation presentation state, or the first interval presentation state, until the transition to the continuous lottery presentation state occurs. From the pseudo-bonus performance state, only the second interval performance state is entered (11). Therefore, the player can always receive a continuous lottery with a high probability. Furthermore, once the transition to the second interval performance state is determined, even if the transition to the pseudo bonus performance state is not determined in the continuous lottery performance state, the performance state control means 614 immediately changes the performance state. A transition is made to a non-advantageous performance state without returning to a normal performance state (12). Therefore, if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus performance state in the continuous lottery performance state, the pseudo bonus performance state → preparation performance state → first interval performance state → continue until the continuous lottery in the continuous lottery performance state is missed again. It is possible to repeat the transition of the lottery presentation state. In this way, once the state shifts to the second interval performance state, it is possible to repeat the transition from the pseudo bonus performance state → the second interval performance state → the continuous lottery performance state with high probability, and further, in the continuous lottery performance state, the pseudo bonus performance state Even if the transition to the bonus performance state is not decided, at least the transition from the pseudo bonus performance state → preparation performance state → first interval performance state → continuous lottery performance state can be repeated, so that the player can play more games. It becomes possible to accumulate medals. In other words, the second interval presentation state can be said to be more advantageous than the first interval presentation state.

Furthermore, as described above, when transitioning from the pseudo-bonus performance state to the second interval performance state, unlike the transition to the first interval performance state, the performance state control means 614 does not allow the transition to the non-advantageous section. do not have. In this embodiment, when the pseudo bonus performance state is the first pseudo bonus performance state, the performance state control means 614 does not shift to the second interval performance state, but temporarily changes the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. , and the state is always shifted to the first interval performance state. This means that the advantageous section has been reset once. Therefore, even if the advantageous section is not reset when transitioning to the second interval presentation state, the pseudo bonus presentation state passing through the second interval presentation state will not end in a short period of time due to the limitation of the advantageous section, and the player A large number of medals can be obtained through the loop of pseudo bonus performance state → second interval performance state → continuous lottery performance state.

Hereinafter, specific processing in the main control board 500 and the sub control board 502 will be explained based on a flowchart.

(CPU initialization process of main control board 500)
FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating CPU initialization processing in main control board 500. When power is supplied from the power board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 500a, and the main CPU 500a performs the following CPU initialization process (S2000).

(Step S2000-1)
When the power is turned on, the main CPU 500a reads a startup program from the main ROM 500b as an initial setting process, and performs setting processes necessary to execute various processes.

(Step S2000-3)
The main CPU 500a sets a wait processing time in a timer counter.

(Step S2000-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether a power-off notice signal is detected. Note that the main control board 500 is provided with a power-off detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, a power-off warning signal is output from the power-off detection circuit. If a power cutoff notice signal is detected, the process moves to step S2000-3, and if a power cutoff notice signal is not detected, the process moves to step S2000-7.

(Step S2000-7)
Main CPU 500a determines whether the wait processing time set in step S2000-3 above has elapsed. As a result, if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed, the process moves to step S2000-9, and if it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed, the process moves to step S2000-5.

(Step S2000-9)
The main CPU 500a executes necessary processing to permit access to the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2000-11)
The main CPU 500a executes checksum confirmation processing. Here, the main CPU 500a calculates a checksum, and determines whether the calculated checksum does not match (is abnormal) the checksum saved at the time of power-off, and whether the backup is abnormal. Then, if the main CPU 500a determines that one or both of the backup and checksum is abnormal, it turns on the backup abnormality flag, and if it determines that both the backup and the checksum are not abnormal, it turns on the backup abnormality flag. Turn off.

(Step S2000-13)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the backup abnormality flag is on. As a result, if it is determined that the backup abnormality flag is on, the process moves to step S2010, and if it is determined that the backup abnormality flag is not on, the process moves to step S2020.

(Step S2010)
The main CPU 500a executes cold start processing. Note that this cold start processing will be described later.

(Step S2020)
The main CPU 500a executes a setting value switching process for switching setting values. Note that this setting value switching process will be described later.

(Step S2030)
The main CPU 500a executes a state recovery process to return to the state immediately before the power was turned off. Note that this state recovery process will be described later.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating cold start processing (S2010) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2010-1)
The main CPU 500a clears the used area in the main RAM 500c and executes a used area RAM check process to detect abnormalities in the used area.

(Step S2010-3)
The main CPU 500a clears the separate area (unused area) in the main RAM 500c, and executes a separate area RAM check process to detect an abnormality in the separate area. Note that if an abnormality is detected in another area in the other area RAM check process, the main CPU 500a turns on the RAM read/write error flag.

(Step S2010-5)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "EA" indicating an abnormality in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2010-7)
The main CPU 500a determines whether an abnormality is detected in step S2010-1. As a result, if it is determined that an abnormality has been detected in step S2010-1, the process moves to step S2011, and if it is determined that no abnormality has been detected in step S2010-1, the process moves to step S2010-9. Transfer processing.

(Step S2010-9)
The main CPU 500a acquires a RAM read/write error flag that is turned on when an abnormality is detected in step S2010-3.

(Step S2010-11)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the RAM read/write error flag is on. As a result, if it is determined that the RAM read/write error flag is on, the process moves to step S2011, and if it is determined that the RAM read/write error flag is not on, the process moves to step S2020.

(Step S2020)
The main CPU 500a executes a setting value switching process for switching setting values. Note that this setting value switching process will be described later.

(Step S2010-13)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "E7" indicating a backup error.

(Step S2011)
The main CPU 500a executes error stop processing to stop the progress of the game due to an error. Note that this error stop processing will be described later.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating the error stop processing (S2011) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2011-1)
The main CPU 500a sets the initial stack pointer value as the address of the stack pointer.

(Step S2011-3)
The main CPU 500a executes an error setting process for setting an error display and a warning sound.

(Step S2011-5)
The main CPU 500a sets external signals 1 to 3 output bits off to turn off the output images of the bits corresponding to external signals 1 to 3.

(Step S2011-7)
The main CPU 500a executes output port image set processing to update the output image for the bits set in step S2011-5 above.

(Step S2011-9)
The main CPU 500a shifts to an eternal loop. As a result, the progress of the game will be stopped.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating the setting value switching process (S2020) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2020-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires a signal from input port 1, and determines whether a set value switching condition is satisfied based on the acquired signal from input port 1. As a result, if it is determined that the set value switching condition is not satisfied, the set value switching process is ended, and if it is determined that the set value switching condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S2020-3. . Here, the signals of input port 1 include a signal indicating whether the upper front door 404 and lower front door 406 are open, and a signal indicating whether the setting key is turned on. Here, the setting value switching condition is satisfied when a signal indicating that the upper front door 404 and lower front door 406 are open and a signal indicating that the setting key is turned on is obtained. It is determined that this is the case.

(Step S2020-3)
The main CPU 500a executes RAM clear processing to clear the used area in the main RAM 500c that should be cleared when changing settings.

(Step S2020-5)
The main CPU 500a executes table content setting processing to transfer the table data of the setting value switching data table to the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2020-7)
The main CPU 500a sets a setting change start command in the transmission buffer, which indicates to start changing the setting value.

(Step S2020-9)
The main CPU 500a executes an edge check process to detect a rising edge (on edge) and a falling edge (off edge) of a signal at an input port.

(Step S2020-11)
The main CPU 500a obtains setting value data indicating current setting values.

(Step S2020-13)
The main CPU 500a determines whether an on-edge of the setting change switch is detected in step S2020-9. As a result, if it is determined that the on-edge of the setting change switch is not detected, the process moves to step S2020-17, and if it is determined that the on-edge of the setting change switch is detected, the process moves to step S2020-15. .

(Step S2020-15)
The main CPU 500a increments the setting value data by one.

(Step S2020-17)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the setting value data is within a range (1 to 6) that can be set as a setting value. As a result, if it is determined that the set value data is within the range, the process moves to step S2020-21, and if it is determined that the set value data is not within the range, the process moves to step S2020-19.

(Step S2020-19)
The main CPU 500a sets the setting value data to 0.

(Step S2020-21)
The main CPU 500a updates the setting value data to the value incremented or set in step S2020-15 or step S2020-19.

(Step S2020-23)
The main CPU 500a executes display data conversion processing to display the set value on the main credit display section 430.

(Step S2020-25)
The main CPU 500a determines whether an on-edge of the setting change switch is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the on-edge of the setting change switch is not detected, the process moves to step S2020-31, and if it is determined that the on-edge of the setting change switch is detected, the process moves to step S2020-27. move.

(Step S2020-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the setting change switch is on. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch is on, the process moves to step S2020-27, and if it is determined that the setting change switch is not on, the process moves to step S2020-29.

(Step S2020-29)
The main CPU 500a sets a setting change switch interval timer.

(Step S2020-31)
The main CPU 500a executes a timer wait process of waiting until the setting change switch interval timer reaches 0.

(Step S2020-33)
The main CPU 500a determines whether an on-edge of the start switch 418 has been detected. As a result, if it is determined that the on-edge of the start switch 418 is not detected, the process moves to step S2020-9, and if it is determined that the on-edge of the start switch 418 is detected, the process proceeds to step S2020-35. move.

(Step S2020-35)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the setting key is off. As a result, if it is determined that the setting key is off, the process moves to step S2020-35, and if it is determined that the setting key is not off, the process moves to step S2020-37.

(Step S2020-37)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the setting key is on. As a result, if it is determined that the setting key is on, the process moves to step S2020-37, and if it is determined that the setting key is not on, the process moves to step S2021.

(Step S2021)
The main CPU 500a executes initialization start processing to start initialization start. Note that this initialization start processing will be described later.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating initialization start processing (S2021) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2021-1)
The main CPU 500a sets a setting change end command in the transmission buffer indicating that the setting value change has been completed.

(Step S2021-3)
The main CPU 500a sets a setting change state command in the transmission buffer indicating the state when the setting value change is completed.

(Step S2021-5)
The main CPU 500a sets a wait timer at the start of initialization.

(Step S2021-7)
The main CPU 500a executes a timer wait process of waiting until the wait timer reaches 0 at the start of initialization.

(Step S2021-9)
The main CPU 500a executes a RAM clear process when changing settings to clear another area of the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2021-11)
The main CPU 500a executes RAM clear processing to clear the used area in the main RAM 500c that should be cleared when changing settings.

(Step S2021-13)
The main CPU 500a sets a gaming state command indicating the current gaming state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2100)
The main CPU 500a executes a game start process for starting the game. Note that this game start process will be described later.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating the state recovery process (S2030) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2030-1)
The main CPU 500a restores the stack pointer.

(Step S2030-3)
The main CPU 500a executes an unused area clearing process to clear an unused area of the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2030-5)
The main CPU 500a clears the stack pointer storage buffer.

(Step S2030-7)
The main CPU 500a sets (turns on) a flag after power-off recovery.

(Step S2030-9)
The main CPU 500a executes port input processing to update the image of the input port.

(Step S2030-11)
The main CPU 500a executes an operation target bit extraction process for extracting information on the operation target bit based on the image of the input port updated in step S2030-9.

(Step S2030-13)
The main CPU 500a sets the operation target bit extracted in step S2030-11 above as the operation target bit in the previous state.

(Step S2030-15)
The main CPU 500a acquires the motor phases of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c. Here, a motor phase is set as the state of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c. The motor phase indicates the operating state of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c, that is, during acceleration, steady rotation, stop, and standby. Specifically, a 1-byte (memory unit) variable assigned to a motor phase is set according to the operating state of the stepping motor 452: accelerating = 3, steady rotation = 2, stopped = 1, and waiting = Changes to a value such as 0.

(Step S2030-17)
The main CPU 500a determines whether any of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c are rotating steadily or accelerating based on the motor phase acquired in step S2030-15. As a result, if it is determined that none of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c is rotating normally or accelerating, the process moves to step S2030-21, and one of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c is rotating normally or accelerating. If it is determined that it is inside, the process moves to step S2030-19.

(Step S2030-19)
The main CPU 500a executes rotation error processing to perform settings when an error is detected for the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c.

(Step S2030-21)
The main CPU 500a restores the saved register group.

(Step S2030-23)
The main CPU 500a allows the interrupt and ends the state recovery process. As a result, the main CPU 500a returns to the state immediately before the power was turned off.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating the game start process (S2100) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2100-1)
The main CPU 500a executes a re-gaming state identification signal output setting process for outputting a re-gaming state identification signal indicating whether or not it is a re-gaming.

(Step S2100-3)
The main CPU 500a sets an input number display output bit off for turning off (turns off) a bit corresponding to the input number display that displays the number of medals inserted (bet number).

(Step S2100-5)
Main CPU 500a executes output port image set processing to update the output image for the bits set in step S2100-3 above.

(Step S2100-7)
The main CPU 500a sets a game start wait timer.

(Step S2100-9)
The main CPU 500a executes a timer wait process of waiting until the game start wait timer reaches 0.

(Step S2100-11)
The main CPU 500a executes one game RAM clearing process to clear the area to be cleared for each game among the used areas in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2100-13)
The main CPU 500a executes a bonus signal setting process for setting a bonus signal.

(Step S2100-15)
The main CPU 500a executes edge clear processing to clear edge information of the input port image.

(Step S2200)
The main CPU 500a executes a game medal insertion process that accepts the insertion of medals. Note that this game medal insertion process will be described later.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating the game medal insertion process (S2200) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2200-1)
The main CPU 500a executes error confirmation processing to confirm the detection results of various errors.

(Step S2200-3)
The main CPU 500a executes an edge check process to detect a rising edge (on edge) and a falling edge (off edge) of a signal at an input port.

(Step S2200-5)
The main CPU 500a acquires a door open error detection flag that is set to 1 when the front upper door 404 or the front lower door 406 is opened.

(Step S2200-7)
Main CPU 500a determines whether upper front door 404 and lower front door 406 are closed based on the door open error detection flag acquired in step S2200-5 above. As a result, if it is determined that the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 are closed, the process moves to step S2200-17, and if at least one of the front upper door 404 or the front lower door 406 is not closed. If determined, the process moves to step S2200-9.

(Step S2200-9)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "E8" indicating that at least one of the upper front door 404 and the lower front door 406 is open.

(Step S2200-11)
The main CPU 500a displays an error, requests a warning sound, and executes error wait processing for waiting for error recovery.

(Step S2200-13)
The main CPU 500a executes a setting value confirmation process to confirm the setting value.

(Step S2200-15)
The main CPU 500a executes edge clear processing to clear edge information of the input port image.

(Step S2200-17)
The main CPU 500a executes a credit button check process to refund the stored medals when a credit switch (not shown) for refunding the stored (credited) medals is pressed.

(Step S2200-19)
The main CPU 500a executes processing related to a game medal insertion button for betting medals. Here, when the bet switch 416 is pressed, the player bets the stored (credited) medals up to a specified number, and subtracts the stored number by the bet number. Further, when medals are inserted through the medal slot 414a, bets are made up to a specified number of medals, and when more medals are inserted than the specified number, the amount is added to the stored number of medals.

(Step S2200-21)
The main CPU 500a executes game medal acquisition processing to check whether the number of inserted medals is a specified number.

(Step S2200-23)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the number of inserted sheets is not the specified number based on the confirmation result in step S2200-21. As a result, if it is determined that the number of inserted sheets is not the specified number, the process moves to step S2200-1, and if it is determined that the number of inserted sheets is the specified number, the process moves to step S2200-25.

(Step S2200-25)
The main CPU 500a sets a start indicator output bit for turning on (lighting up) a start indicator (not shown) indicating whether or not the operation of the start switch 418 is valid.

(Step S2200-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether a falling edge (pressing) of the start switch 418 has been detected. As a result, if it is determined that the falling edge of the start switch 418 has not been detected, the process moves to step S2200-1, and if it is determined that the falling edge of the start switch 418 has been detected, the process moves to step S2200-1. Processing moves to -29.

(Step S2200-29)
The main CPU 500a clears the main payout display section buffer in order to clear the display on the main payout display section 432.

(Step S2200-31)
The main CPU 500a executes a re-gaming state identification signal clearing process to clear the re-gaming state identification signal.

(Step S2200-33)
The main CPU 500a executes blocker closing preprocessing to turn off the start indicator.

(Step S2200-35)
The main CPU 500a sets a lever press command indicating that the start switch 418 has been pressed in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2300)
The main CPU 500a executes an internal lottery process for determining the winning type. Note that this internal lottery process will be described later.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating the internal lottery process (S2300) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2300-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires setting value data.

(Step S2300-3)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "EC" indicating a setting value abnormality error.

(Step S2300-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the setting value data acquired in step S2300-1 is abnormal. As a result, if it is determined that the set value data is abnormal, the process moves to step S2011, and if it is determined that the set value data is not abnormal, the process moves to step S2300-7.

(Step S2300-7)
The main CPU 500a obtains the winning type lottery random number updated by the random number generator 500d.

(Step S2300-9)
The main CPU 500a executes a state offset acquisition process to acquire an offset value related to the gaming state.

(Step S2300-11)
The main CPU 500a sets the address of the internal lottery area definition table (winning type lottery table).

(Step S2300-13)
The main CPU 500a sets the value indicated by the address obtained by adding the offset value obtained in step S2300-9 above to the address set in step S2300-11 above as the initial value of the winning area. Here, the first winning area in the winning type lottery table of the current gaming state is set as the initial value.

(Step S2300-15)
The main CPU 500a acquires lottery data, which is a numerical value indicating the winning range of the winning area, and executes lottery data acquisition processing to shift the winning area by 1.

(Step S2300-17)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not to perform a winning type lottery. As a result, if it is determined that the winning type lottery will not be performed, the process moves to step S2300-21, and if it is determined that the winning type lottery is to be performed, the process moves to step S2300-19.

(Step S2300-19)
The main CPU 500a subtracts the lottery data from the random number value.

(Step S2300-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the subtraction result in step S2300-19 is negative, that is, whether the winning area has been won by the winning type lottery. As a result, if it is determined that the player has won the winning type lottery, the process moves to step S2400, and if it is determined that the player has not won the winning type lottery, the process moves to step S2300-23.

(Step S2300-23)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the winning type lottery has ended. As a result, if it is determined that the winning type lottery has not ended, the process moves to step S2300-15, and if it is determined that the winning type lottery has ended, the process moves to step S2300-25.

(Step S2300-25)
The main CPU 500a clears the trigger role type.

(Step S2400)
The main CPU 500a executes a symbol code setting process for setting a symbol code based on the winning area and the gaming state. Note that this symbol code setting process will be described later.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating the symbol code setting process (S2400) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2400-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the winning area won in step S2300, and executes a gaming state setting process of setting the gaming state to the internal medium gaming state if the acquired winning area includes a bonus combination.

(Step S2400-3)
The main CPU 500a sets the winning area acquired in step S2400-1 above as a stop control number.

(Step S2400-5)
The main CPU 500a determines (sets) the winning type based on the winning area acquired in step S2400-1 above.

(Step S2400-7)
The main CPU 500a executes a symbol code initial setting process for setting a symbol code indicating a displayable symbol and a drawing target symbol based on the stop control number set in step S2400-3.

(Step S2400-9)
The main CPU 500a executes display symbol bit initial value setting processing for setting display symbol bits.

(Step S2400-11)
The main CPU 500a executes an execution flag setting process that sets an execution flag, performs various processes related to the presentation state, processes related to auxiliary presentation, and the like.

(Step S2400-13)
The main CPU 500a sets a production command, which is a command related to an advantageous section, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2400-15)
The main CPU 500a sets a winning information command indicating the winning type in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2400-17)
The main CPU 500a checks the one-game timer.

(Step S2400-19)
The main CPU 500a sets in the transmission buffer a pre-rotation command indicating that the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c are before rotation.

(Step S2400-21)
The main CPU 500a executes an excitation release wait process for waiting for excitation release of the stepping motor 452.

(Step S2400-23)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the one-game timer is not 0. As a result, if it is determined that the one-game timer is not 0, the process moves to step S2400-23, and if it is determined that the one-game timer is 0, the process moves to step S2400-25.

(Step S2400-25)
The main CPU 500a executes a reel start process for starting the rotation of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c. Here, the motor phase of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c is set to be accelerated to start the rotation of each reel, and the one-game timer is set to a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds.

(Step S2400-27)
The main CPU 500a sets a reel start command in the transmission buffer indicating that the rotation of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c has started.

(Step S2500)
The main CPU 500a executes a reel rotation process which is a process while the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c are rotating. Note that this process during rotation of the drum will be described later.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart illustrating processing during rotation of the drum (S2500) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2500-1)
The main CPU 500a sets the stop indicator output bit off (output image) to turn off (extinguish) the bit corresponding to the indicators (not shown) of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c. Here, the stop indicator output bit is composed of a 3-bit bit string, and each bit is associated with the emission color of the three stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c, and is represented by blue = 1 and red = 0. be done.

(Step S2500-3)
Main CPU 500a executes output port image set processing to update the output image for the bits set in step S2500-1 above.

(Step S2500-5)
The main CPU 500a executes error confirmation processing to confirm the detection results of various errors.

(Step S2500-7)
The main CPU 500a refers to the index flag and obtains the indexes of the rotating reels 410a, 410b, and 410c. Note that the index flag is set only after the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c reach a constant rotation speed.In other words, the index flag is set when the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c are rotated at a constant speed. It also shows that the speed has been reached.

(Step S2500-9)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the index flags of all the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c have been detected. As a result, if it is determined that all index flags have not been detected, the process moves to step S2500-1, and if it is determined that all index flags have been detected, the process moves to step S2500-11.

(Step S2500-11)
The main CPU 500a obtains stop reel bits indicating the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c that have stopped or started to stop. Here, the stop reel bit is composed of a 3-bit bit string, each bit is associated with one of the three reels 410a, 410b, and 410c, and the constant speed state = 1, acceleration state, and deceleration state. Alternatively, the stopped state is represented by 0.

(Step S2500-13)
The main CPU 500a stores the stop drum bit acquired in step S2500-11 above as a drum rotating flag.

(Step S2500-15)
The main CPU 500a sets the stop indicator output bit on (output image) to turn on (turn off) the bit corresponding to the indicators (not shown) of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c.

(Step S2500-17)
The main CPU 500a acquires an image of input port 0, and executes operation target bit extraction processing for extracting operation target bits from the acquired image. Here, the bit to be manipulated is composed of a 3-bit bit string, and each bit is associated with one of the three stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c, and the bit being manipulated = 1 and not being manipulated. =0.

(Step S2500-19)
The main CPU 500a calculates the logical product of the rotation drum flag acquired in step S2500-13 and the operation target bit extracted in step S2500-17. Here, if the reel 410 is rotating and the stop switch 420 corresponding to the reel is operated, that is, if the operated stop switch 420 corresponds to the reel 410 that is effectively rotating. , the logical product is 1.

(Step S2500-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the logical product calculated in step S2500-19 is 0, that is, whether the stop switch 420 corresponding to the rotating reel 410 has been operated. As a result, if it is determined that the stop switch 420 corresponding to the rotating reel 410 is not operated, the process moves to step S2500-3, and the stop switch 420 corresponding to the rotating reel 410 is not operated. If it is determined that it is, the process moves to step S2500-23.

(Step S2500-23)
The main CPU 500a obtains an output image including the stop indicator output bit, and calculates a logical product between the obtained output image and the logical product calculated in step S2500-19. Here, when the operated stop switch 420 is lit in red, the AND bit becomes 0, and when the operated stop switch 420 is lit in blue, the AND bit becomes 1.

(Step S2500-25)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the logical product calculated in step S2500-23 is 0, that is, whether the operated stop switch 420 is lit in red. As a result, if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is lit in red, the process moves to step S2500-1, and if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is not lit in red, the process proceeds to step S2500-1. The process moves to step 27.

(Step S2500-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the operated stop switch 420 is valid. As a result, if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is not valid, the process moves to step S2500-1, and if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is valid, the process moves to step S2500-29. Move. Note that here, it is determined whether or not the number of operated stop switches 420 is one. If it is determined that the number of operated stop switches 420 is one, the process moves to step S2500-29, and if it is determined that the number of operated stop switches 420 is not one, that is, two or more. Then, the process moves to step S2500-1.

(Step S2500-29)
The main CPU 500a executes a stop control reel setting process to obtain various parameters for stopping the reel 410 corresponding to the operated stop switch 420.

(Step S2500-31)
The main CPU 500a prohibits interrupts.

(Step S2500-33)
The main CPU 500a executes a press reference position acquisition process that derives the symbol number of the symbol located on the active line A as the press reference position.

(Step S2500-35)
The main CPU 500a executes a sliding piece number acquisition process that determines the number of sliding pieces on the reel 410.

(Step S2600)
The main CPU 500a executes a reel stop process to stop the reel 410 corresponding to the operated stop switch 420. Note that this rotation drum stop processing will be described later.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating the rotation drum stop process (S2600) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2600-1)
The main CPU 500a obtains the press reference position derived in step S2500-35 above.

(Step S2600-3)
The main CPU 500a calculates a stop request number by correcting the number of sliding frames determined in step S2500-37 above with respect to the press reference position obtained in step S2600-1 above.

(Step S2600-5)
The main CPU 500a sets a stop request flag (sets it to 1). The stop request flag is a flag for requesting a program running in parallel to stop the target reel 410. By setting the stop request flag to 1, the symbol corresponding to the stop request number is enabled. It becomes possible to stop on line A. The stop request flag and the above-mentioned stop request number are read by a program running in parallel, and the reel 410 is stopped. Note that when the stop processing is completed, the stop request flag is reset to 0 (OFF) by the program.

(Step S2600-7)
The main CPU 500a allows interrupts.

(Step S2600-9)
The main CPU 500a sets a stop information command indicating the order in which the reels 410 are stopped in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2600-11)
The main CPU 500a sets the stop indicator output bit OFF (output image) to turn off (extinguish) the bit corresponding to the indicator (not shown) of the stop switch 420.

(Step S2600-13)
Main CPU 500a executes output port image set processing to update the output image for the bits set in step S2600-11 above.

(Step S2600-15)
The main CPU 500a executes display symbol bit setting processing for setting display symbol bits.

(Step S2600-17)
The main CPU 500a executes next cylinder setting preprocessing to stop the next reel 410.

(Step S2600-19)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the stopping process for all reels 410 has been completed. As a result, if it is determined that the stop processing of all reels 410 has not been completed, the process moves to step S2500, and if it is determined that the stop processing of all reels 410 has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2600-21. Transfer processing.

(Step S2600-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the stop request flag is on for any reel 410, that is, whether all reels 410 have been stopped. As a result, if it is determined that all the reels 410 have not been stopped, the process moves to step S2600-21, and if it is determined that all the reels 410 have stopped, the process moves to step S2600-23.

(Step S2600-23)
The main CPU 500a executes error confirmation processing to confirm the detection results of various errors.

(Step S2600-25)
The main CPU 500a executes a manipulation target bit extraction process that extracts information on the manipulation target bit.

(Step S2600-27)
Main CPU 500a determines whether stop switch 420 is pressed based on the operation target bit acquired in step S2600-25 above. As a result, if it is determined that the stop switch 420 is pressed down, the process moves to step S2600-23, and if it is determined that the stop switch 420 is not pressed down, the process moves to step S2700.

(Step S2700)
The main CPU 500a executes a display determination process to determine the winning winning combination. Note that this display determination process will be described later.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart illustrating the display determination process (S2700) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2700-1)
The main CPU 500a clears the buffer of the main payout display section 432.

(Step S2700-3)
The main CPU 500a determines whether a display determination abnormality has occurred based on whether or not the symbol combination displayed on the active line A matches the symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed on the active line A. Execute the detection process.

(Step S2700-5)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "EE" indicating a display determination abnormality (error).

(Step S2700-7)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the display determination is abnormal based on the determination result in step S2700-3. As a result, if it is determined that the display determination is abnormal, the process moves to step S2011, and if it is determined that the display determination is not abnormal, the process moves to step S2700-9.

(Step S2700-9)
The main CPU 500a executes display symbol identification generation processing to determine the winning winning combination based on the symbol combinations stopped (displayed) on the active line A.

(Step S2700-11)
The main CPU 500a sets 0 as the initial value of the number of coins to be paid out.

(Step S2700-13)
The main CPU 500a determines whether a small winning combination has been won. As a result, if it is determined that a small winning combination has been won, the process moves to step S2700-15, and if it is determined that a small winning combination has not been won, the process moves to step S2700-35.

(Step S2700-15)
The main CPU 500a turns on a winning flag indicating that a small winning combination has been won.

(Step S2700-17)
The main CPU 500a executes a payout number setting process for setting a payout number according to the winning small winning combination.

(Step S2700-19)
The main CPU 500a determines whether it is an advantageous section. As a result, if it is determined that it is not an advantageous section, the process moves to step S2800, and if it is determined that it is an advantageous section, the process moves to step S2700-21.

(Step S2700-21)
The main CPU 500a obtains the value of the advantageous section MY counter that counts the net increase in the number of sheets during the advantageous section.

(Step S2700-23)
The main CPU 500a adds the number of coins to be paid out to the value of the advantageous section MY counter acquired in step S2700-23.

(Step S2700-25)
The main CPU 500a obtains the number of coins inserted in the game.

(Step S2700-27)
The main CPU 500a subtracts the number of inserted sheets from the value added in step S2700-23.

(Step S2700-29)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the subtraction result in step S2700-27 is not negative. As a result, if it is determined that the subtraction result is not negative, the process moves to step S2700-33, and if it is determined that the subtraction result is negative, the process moves to step S2700-31.

(Step S2700-31)
The main CPU 500a clears the value of the advantageous section MY counter (sets it to 0).

(Step S2700-33)
The main CPU 500a updates the value of the advantageous section MY counter to the value subtracted in step S2700-27 or the value cleared in step S2700-31.

(Step S2700-35)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the replay combination has won. As a result, if it is determined that the replay combination has not won, the process moves to step S2800, and if it is determined that the replay combination has won, the process moves to step S2700-37.

(Step S2700-37)
The main CPU 500a sets the number of coins to be put in to the number of coins to be paid out.

(Step S2700-39)
The main CPU 500a turns on the replay flag.

(Step S2700-41)
The main CPU 500a sets the number of automatically inserted sheets.

(Step S2800)
The main CPU 500a executes a payout process for paying out medals. Note that this payout process will be described later.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating the payout process (S2800) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2800-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the re-gaming operation flag.

(Step S2800-3)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout start command in the transmission buffer indicating that the payout of medals has started.

(Step S2800-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the replay combination has won based on the replay active flag acquired in step S2800-1. As a result, if it is determined that the replay combination has won, the process moves to step S2800-41, and if it is determined that the replay combination has not won, the process moves to step S2800-7.

(Step S2800-7)
The main CPU 500a executes a main display display process to display 0 on the main payout display section 432.

(Step S2800-9)
The main CPU 500a determines that there is no payout (the number of coins to be paid out is 0). As a result, if it is determined that there is no payout, the process moves to step S2800-35, and if it is determined that there is a payout, the process moves to step S2800-11.

(Step S2800-11)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the number of stored sheets is 50 or more. As a result, if it is determined that the stored number is 50 or more, the process moves to step S2800-13, and if it is determined that the stored number is not 50 or more, the process moves to step S2800-15.

(Step S2800-13)
The main CPU 500a executes a medal payout device control process to pay out one medal from the medal payout device 442, and moves the process to step S2800-23.

(Step S2800-15)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout start interval timer.

(Step S2800-17)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the payout start timer is not 0, that is, whether it is the first payout. As a result, if it is determined that it is the first payout time, the process moves to step S2800-21, and if it is determined that it is not the first payout time, the process moves to step S2800-19.

(Step S2800-19)
The main CPU 500a executes a timer wait process to wait until the payout start interval timer becomes 0.

(Step S2800-21)
The main CPU 500a increments the number of stored sheets by one.

(Step S2800-23)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout execution command indicating that one medal has been paid out in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2800-25)
The main CPU 500a executes main display pre-display processing to display the number of coins that have already been paid out on the main payout display section 432.

(Step S2800-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the game is in a bonus game state or not. As a result, if it is determined that the bonus game state is not present, the process moves to step S2800-31, and if it is determined that the bonus game state is present, the process moves to step S2800-29.

(Step S2800-29)
The main CPU 500a increments the number of medals obtained during bonus operation, which is the number of medals paid out in the bonus game state, by one.

(Step S2800-31)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the payout of the number of medals to be paid out has not been completed. As a result, if it is determined that the payout has not been completed, the process moves to step S2800-11, and if it is determined that the payout has finished, the process moves to step S2800-33.

(Step S2800-33)
The main CPU 500a executes a payout end process to end the payout of medals.

(Step S2800-35)
The main CPU 500a determines whether an over error has been detected. As a result, if it is determined that no over error has been detected, the process moves to step S2800-41, and if it is determined that an over error has been detected, the process moves to step S2800-37.

(Step S2800-37)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "E5" indicating an over error.

(Step S2800-39)
The main CPU 500a displays an error, requests a warning sound, and executes error wait processing for waiting for error recovery.

(Step S2800-41)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout end command indicating that the payout of medals has ended in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2900)
The main CPU 500a executes a game transition process that performs a game state transition, a process for managing advantageous sections, and the like. Note that this game transfer process will be described later.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart illustrating the game transfer process (S2900) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2900-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the replay active flag, and turns on or off a bit corresponding to a replay indicator (not shown) indicating that the next game is a replay based on the acquired replay active flag. For this purpose, the stop indicator output bit off (output image) is set, and replay indicator control processing is executed to update the output bit of the set output image.

(Step S2900-3)
When a bonus combination is won, the main CPU 500a executes an accessory activation symbol display process that sets various parameters for controlling the bonus game state.

(Step S2900-5)
In the bonus game state, when the number of coins acquired during bonus operation reaches a predetermined number, the main CPU 500a executes a bonus operation termination process to shift the game state to a non-internal game state.

(Step S2900-7)
The main CPU 500a executes advantageous section update processing for managing advantageous sections.

(Step S2900-9)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the next game is in an AT performance state. As a result, if it is determined that the next game is not in the AT effect state, the process moves to step S2900-15, and if it is determined that the next game is in the AT effect state, the process moves to step S2900-11.

(Step S2900-11)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the game is in a bonus game state or not. As a result, if it is determined that the bonus game state is not present, the process moves to step S2900-15, and if it is determined that the bonus game state is present, the process moves to step S2900-13.

(Step S2900-13)
The main CPU 500a sets an advantageous lamp flag to turn on the section indicator 460.

(Step S2900-15)
The main CPU 500a executes a production command setting process that sets a production command, which is a command related to an advantageous section, in a transmission buffer.

(Step S2900-17)
The main CPU 500a sets a game end command indicating that one game has ended in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2900-19)
The main CPU 500a executes terminal board signal output processing for outputting external signals.

(Step S2900-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the performance wait timer set when ending the advantageous section in step S2900-7 is not 0. As a result, if it is determined that the presentation wait timer is not 0, the process moves to step S2900-21, and if it is determined that the presentation wait timer is 0, the process moves to step S2900-23.

(Step S2900-23)
The main CPU 500a sets a gaming status command indicating the gaming status in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2900-25)
The main CPU 500a sets a game start command indicating the start of the next game in the transmission buffer, and moves the process to step S2100.

One game is executed through a series of processes from step S2100 to step S2900. Thereafter, steps S2100 to S2900 will be repeated.

Next, the power-off saving process and timer interrupt process in the main control board 500 will be described.

(Evacuation processing when the main control board 500 is powered off)
FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating a power-off save process in the main control board 500. The main CPU 500a monitors the power-off detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, interrupts and executes a power-off save process.

(Step S3000-1)
When the power-off notice signal is input, the main CPU 500a saves the register.

(Step S3000-3)
The main CPU 500a checks the power-off notice signal.

(Step S3000-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether a power-off notice signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that a power-off notice signal has been detected, the process moves to step S3000-11, and if it is determined that a power-off notice signal has not been detected, the process moves to step S3000-7. .

(Step S3000-7)
The main CPU 500a restores the register.

(Step S3000-9)
The main CPU 500a performs processing to permit interrupts, and ends the power-off save processing.

(Step S3000-11)
The main CPU 500a executes output port clear processing to stop output from the output port.

(Step S3000-13)
The main CPU 500a executes a save process for another area when the power is turned off.

(Step S3000-15)
The main CPU 500a executes RAM protect setting processing necessary to prohibit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S3000-17)
The main CPU 500a sets the predetermined number of times the power outage detection signal has been detected to the counter value of the loop counter in order to set the power outage occurrence monitoring time.

(Step S3000-19)
The main CPU 500a subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter set in step S3000-17 above.

(Step S3000-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the counter value of the loop counter is not zero. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process moves to step S3000-19, and if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process moves to the above-described CPU initialization process (step S1000).

Note that if a power outage actually occurs, the operation of the slot machine 400 is stopped while the steps S3000-19 to S3000-21 are looped.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 500)
FIG. 105 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing in main control board 500. The main control board 500 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit that generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (1.49 milliseconds in the simultaneous running reference example, hereinafter referred to as "1.49ms"). Then, when a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, an interrupt is generated and the following timer interrupt processing is executed.

(Step S3100-1)
The main CPU 500a saves the register.

(Step S3100-3)
The main CPU 500a clears the interrupt flag.

(Step S3100-5)
The main CPU 500a reads various input port images and executes port input processing to accurately obtain the latest switch status.

(Step S3100-7)
The main CPU 500a outputs the set output image to the output port, and displays the main credit display section 430, main payout display section 432, input number display, start display, stop switch 420a, 420b, and 420c display, and replay display. Dynamic port output processing is executed to control the lighting of the section indicator 460.

(Step S3100-9)
The main CPU 500a updates the timer interrupt phase. Note that the timer interrupt phase is one of 0 to 3, and here, when the timer interrupt phase is 0, 1, or 2, 1 is added, and when the timer interrupt phase is 3, it is added to 0. Be changed.

(Step S3100-11)
The main CPU 500a performs sub-command transmission processing to transmit the command stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 502.

(Step S3100-13)
The main CPU 500a executes stepping motor control processing to control the stepping motor 452.

(Step S3100-15)
The main CPU 500a executes an output port image output process that outputs an output image to be output to the medal payout device 442.

(Step S3100-17)
The main CPU 500a executes random number update processing to update various random numbers.

(Step S3100-19)
The main CPU 500a executes fraud monitoring processing to detect errors in order to output external signals (external signals 4 and 5) corresponding to the errors to the outside.

(Step S3100-21)
The main CPU 500a executes a module (subroutine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing phase updated in step S3100-9 above. Here, the timer interrupt processing phase is set to one of 0 to 3, and one module is provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing phases 0 to 3 (total of 4). The two modules will be executed once every four times (every 5.96 ms) of timer interrupt processing. For example, a module that executes time monitoring processing for subtracting various timers is associated with one timer interrupt processing phase.

(Step S3100-23)
The main CPU 500a executes test signal output processing to output a test signal to the outside.

(Step S3100-25)
The main CPU 500a reads various input port images and executes port input processing to accurately obtain the latest switch status.

(Step S3100-27)
The main CPU 500a restores the register.

(Step S3100-29)
The main CPU 300a allows the interrupt and ends the timer interrupt processing.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 500 and the sub-control board 502 are arranged to share the functional parts for playing the game, but the functional parts of the main control board 500 are transferred to the sub-control board 502. The functional parts of the sub-control board 502 may be arranged on the main control board 500, or all the functional parts can be arranged on one control board.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, only one type of AT performance state is provided, but it is possible to provide multiple types of AT performance states, such as a specialized zone for adding on the number of continuous games in the AT performance state, for example. Good too.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game is played using medals as the gaming value, but the gaming value may be electrical information (so-called medalless). In this case, when a winning combination is won, the amount of value corresponding to the winning combination may be given to the player in the form of electrical information.

Further, each process performed by the main control board 500 and the sub-control board 502 described above does not necessarily need to be performed in chronological order according to the order described in the flowchart, and may include processing in parallel or by a subroutine.

Further, each process performed by the main control board 500 and the sub-control board 502 described above does not necessarily need to be performed in chronological order according to the order described in the flowchart, and may include processing in parallel or by a subroutine.

<Device management>
In the above description, regarding the gaming machine 100, using FIGS. 5 to 11, the sub CPU 330a includes a state management means (state management task) 331, a device control means (device task) 332, a display control means (drawing task) 333, an audio control means (sound task) 334, operation control means (operation task) 335, lighting control means (lighting task) 336, accessory control means (movable object task) 337, and each device (main performance display section 200a, performance accessory It has been explained that the device 202, the production lighting device 204, the audio output device 206, and the production operation device 208) are controlled. Similarly to the sub control board 330 of the gaming machine 100, in the sub control board 502 of the slot machine 400, the sub CPU 502a has state management means (state management task), device control means (device task), and display control means (drawing task). , functions as a voice control means (sound task), an operation control means (operation task), a lighting control means (lighting task), and an accessory control means (movable object task), and each device (liquid crystal display section 424, accessory device ( Needless to say, it is possible to control the production lamp 426, the speaker 428, and the production switch 422) (not shown).

At this time, the state management means analyzes the command sent from the main control board 500 and generates a message, the device control means analyzes the message and generates presentation data, and the display control means, audio control means, The lighting control means and the accessory control means convert performance data into device data and periodically output the data to each device. Here, by distributing the series of processes into three stages, it is possible to fit each process into the processing time allowed by the timer interrupt time.

In addition, commands, messages, performance data, and device data are not limited to the above-mentioned example described for the gaming machine 100, but also in the slot machine 400, the display control means, the audio control means, the lighting control means, and the accessory control means, respectively. Various aspects are adopted for this purpose. For example, when executing an effect in which a character walks from left to right on the liquid crystal display section 424 in response to the operation of the start switch 418, a command "3000H" from the main control board 500 indicating that the start switch 418 has been operated is executed. ”, the state management means analyzes the command “3000H” and generates a message “100000H” instructing creation of effect data in which the character walks from left to right. The device control means analyzes the message "100000H" and generates production data "55545651156115135163H" indicating that the character walks from left to right. The display control means converts the effect data "55545651156115135163H" into device data "0000111144441111222233334444777H" and outputs it to the image IC 340a. In this way, an effect in which the character walks from left to right is executed on the liquid crystal display section 424.

Furthermore, each process is executed at an appropriate cycle based on the need for early processing and the reaction speed of the device. For example, processes that are highly required to be processed early are preferentially executed in short cycles. In this way, it is possible to speed up the overall processing. Furthermore, for devices with slow response speeds, even if the device data is output early, the response will not be possible, so this is intentionally executed at a long cycle. In this way, other processing can be executed preferentially during a long period, so that processing time can be used effectively.

In particular, in the slot machine 400, there are devices such as a bet switch 416, a start switch 418, and a stop switch 420 that the player directly operates in order to proceed with the game. If the operation of the accessory device, the performance lamp 426, and the speaker 428 is delayed, the player will feel uncomfortable. In this embodiment, the above-described configuration can speed up the overall processing, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Although preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the accompanying drawings, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. It is clear that those skilled in the art can come up with various changes and modifications within the scope of the claims, and it is understood that these naturally fall within the technical scope of the present invention. be done.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control boards 300, 500 and the sub-control boards 330, 502 are arranged so as to share the functional parts for proceeding with the game, but the functional parts of the main control boards 300, 500 are may be arranged on the sub-control boards 330, 502, the functional parts of the sub-control boards 330, 502 may be arranged on the main control boards 300, 500, or all functional parts can be combined into one control board. It can also be arranged.

Further, each process performed by the main control boards 300, 500 and sub-control boards 330, 502 described above does not necessarily have to be performed in chronological order according to the order described in the flowchart, and may include parallel processing or subroutine processing. But that's fine.

100 Gaming machine 300, 500 Main control board (main control section)
300a, 500a Main CPU (processor)
300b, 500b Main ROM (storage means)
300c, 500c Main RAM (storage means)
330, 502 Sub-control board (sub-control unit)
400 slot machine

Claims (2)

a main control section that controls the progress of the game; a sub-control section that controls the performance based on information transmitted from the main control section;
Equipped with
The main control unit includes:
comprising command transmitting means for sequentially determining commands related to the game and transmitting the determined commands to the sub-control unit,
The sub-control unit includes:
a state management means for generating a message by analyzing the received command in response to receiving a command from the main control unit;
device control means that analyzes the message and generates performance data;
A gaming machine equipped with. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a cycle at which the state management means analyzes the command is different from a cycle at which the device control means analyzes the message.

Images